manualshive.com logo in svg

Yealink SIP-T19 E2 T4 Series, Administrator'S Manual

Introducing the Yealink SIP-T19 E2 T4 Series, a feature-packed VoIP phone designed for seamless communication. Easily set up and navigate through its advanced functionalities with the included Quick Start Manual. Download this comprehensive manual for free, exclusively at manualshive.com. Unlock the full potential of your Yealink phone effortlessly.

Share
Download
background image

Configuring  Advanced  Features

 

595

 

Parameters 

Permitted Values 

Default 

Phone User Interface: 

Menu->Features->Paging List->Option->Edit->Address 

multicast.paging_address.X.label 

(X ranges from 1 to 31)

 

String 

Blank 

Description: 

Configures the name of the multicast paging group to be displayed in the paging list. 

It will be displayed on the LCD screen when placing the multicast paging calls. 

Example: 

multicast.paging_address.1.label = Product

 

multicast.paging_address.2.label = Sales

 

Web User Interface: 

Directory->Multicast IP->Paging List->Label 

Phone User Interface: 

Menu->Features->Paging List->Option->Edit->Label

 

multicast.paging_address.X.channel 

(X ranges from 1 to 31)

 

Integer from 0 to 30 

0 

Description: 

Configures the channel of the multicast paging group in the paging list. 

If it is set to 0, all the Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior or Yealink IP 
phones listens to channel 0 or third-party available devices (for example, Cisco IP phones) 
in the paging group can receive the RTP stream. 

If it is set to 1 to 25, the Polycom or Yealink IP phones preconfigured to listen to the 
channel can receive the RTP stream. 

If it is set to 26 to 30, the Yealink IP phones preconfigured to listen to the channel can 
receive the RTP stream. 

Example: 

multicast.paging_address.1.channel = 3

 

multicast.paging_address.2.channel = 5

 

Web User Interface: 

Directory->Multicast IP->Paging List->Channel 

Phone User Interface: 

Menu->Features->Paging List->Option->Edit->Channel 

 

 

Summary of Contents for SIP-T19 E2 T4 Series

Page 1: ...63 ...

Page 2: ...s Without Yealink s express written permission recipient shall not reproduce or transmit any portion hereof in any form or by any means with any purpose other than personal use Warranty 1 Warranty THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS GUIDE ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE ALL STATEMENTS INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS GUIDE ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE AND P...

Page 3: ... into this agreement and to abide by all its terms and conditions just as if you had signed it The EULA for this product is available on the Yealink Support page for the product Patent Information China the United States EU European Union and other countries are protecting one or more patents of accompanying products and or patents being applied by Yealink Customer Feedback We are striving to impr...

Page 4: ...are under the specific terms of the GPL Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms and conditions of the license The original GPL license source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can be downloaded from Yealink web site http www yealink com GPLOpenSource aspx BaseInfoCateId 293 NewsCateId 293 CateId 293 ...

Page 5: ... necessary The information detailed in this guide is applicable to firmware version 82 or higher The firmware format is like x x x x rom The second x from left must be greater than or equal to 82 for example the firmware version of SIP T46G IP phone 28 82 0 20 rom See the Yealink Products Regulatory Notices guide for all regulatory and safety guidance Chapters in This Guide This administrator guid...

Page 6: ...P phones using the boot file and configuration files The purpose of Auto Provisioning Guide is to serve as a basic guidance for provisioning Yealink IP phones with a provisioning server If you are new to this process it is helpful to read this guide Description of Configuration Parameters in CFG Files which describes all configuration parameters in configuration files Note that Yealink administrat...

Page 7: ...n page 713 for hyperlinks to non Yealink websites for example RFC 3315 or for hyperlinks to Yealink Technical Support website Blue Text in Italics Used for hyperlinks to Yealink resources outside of this documentation such as the Yealink documentations for example Yealink_SIP_IP_Phones_Auto_Provisioning_Guide_V81 You also need to know the following writing conventions to distinguish conditional in...

Page 8: ...ype of provisioning methods available for each feature varies not every feature uses all these three methods The central provisioning method requires you to configure parameters located in CFG format configuration files that Yealink provides For more information on configuration files refer to Configuration Files on page 101 As shown below the table specifies the configuration file name and the co...

Page 9: ... enable the auto answer feature or 0 to disable the auto answer feature Note that some parameters described in this guide contain one or more variables for example X or Y But the variables in the parameters described in the CFG file are all replaced with specific value in the scope of variable You may need to assign a value to the variable before you search Sometimes you will see the words Refer t...

Page 10: ...re the SIP server 1 for account 1 you can locate the account 1 sip_server 1 address in the MAC cfg file and configure it as required for example account 1 sip_server 1 address 10 2 1 48 The following shows a segment of MAC cfg file Method 2 Web User Interface As described in the chapter Summary Table Format you can directly navigate to the specified webpage to configure the feature You can also fi...

Page 11: ...ccess to the desired feature according to the phone path for example Menu Features Auto Answer Line X Auto Answer and then configure it as required As shown in the following illustration Recommended References For more information on configuring and administering other Yealink products not included in this guide refer to product support page at Yealink Technical Support To access the latest Releas...

Page 12: ...itiation Protocol SIP are two popular VoIP protocols that are found in widespread implementation H 323 H 323 is a recommendation from the ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector ITU T that defines the protocols to provide audio visual communication sessions on any packet network The H 323 standard addresses call signaling and control multimedia transport and control and bandwidth control for ...

Page 13: ...ansferring party At the end of a call SIP terminates the sessions between all parties SIP Components SIP is a peer to peer protocol The peers in a session are called User Agents UAs A user agent can function as one of following roles User Agent Client UAC A client application that initiates the SIP request User Agent Server UAS A server application that contacts the user when a SIP request is rece...

Page 14: ...that hosts the application responsible for receiving the SIP requests from a UAC and on reception it returns a response to the request back to the UAC The UAS may issue multiple responses to the UAC not necessarily a single response Communication between UAC and UAS is client server and peer to peer Typically a SIP endpoint is capable of functioning as both a UAC and a UAS but it functions only as...

Page 15: ...ple and SIP Components xii VoIP Principle xii SIP Components xiii Table of Contents xv Product Overview 1 SIP IP Phone Models 1 Expansion Modules 1 Getting Started 3 What IP Phones Need to Meet 3 Yealink IP Phones in a Network 3 Initialization Process Overview 4 Verifying Startup 6 Setting Up Your System 7 Setting Up Your Phone Network 7 DHCP 8 DHCP Option 12 Configuring Network Parameters Manuall...

Page 16: ...31 Power Indicator LED 133 Notification Popups 138 Contrast 141 Wallpaper 143 Transparency 150 Screen Saver 152 Customizing a Screen Saver XML Template File 153 Power Saving 169 Backlight 174 Idle Clock Display 178 Bluetooth 179 Page Switch Key 182 Enable Page Tips 183 Page Tips for Expansion Module 185 Label Length 187 Linekey Length in Short 190 Account Registration 192 Multiple Line Keys per Ac...

Page 17: ... Directory Template File 299 Search Source List In Dialing 302 Customizing a Super Search Template File 303 Call Log 306 Save Call Log 306 Backing up the Call Logs 308 Call List Show Number 311 Missed Call Log 312 Local Directory 314 Customizing a Local Contact File 315 Backing up the Local Contacts 332 Live Dialpad 334 Speed Dial 335 Call Waiting 339 Auto Redial 342 Auto Answer 345 IP Direct Auto...

Page 18: ... Call Pickup 450 Recent Call In Dialing 452 ReCall 454 Call Number Filter 456 Call Park 458 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 468 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 473 Mute 475 Allow Mute 475 Keep Mute 477 Intercom 478 Outgoing Intercom Calls 478 Incoming Intercom Calls 484 Call Timeout 488 Ringing Timeout 488 Send user phone 489 SIP Send MAC 491 SIP Send Line 493 Reserve...

Page 19: ...icator MWI 585 Short Message Service SMS 590 Multicast Paging 591 Sending RTP Stream 592 Receiving RTP Stream 601 Dsskey Recording Record and URL Record 607 Hot Desking 614 Logon Wizard 618 Action URL 622 Action URI 641 Configuring Trusted IP Address for Action URI 645 Scenario A Capturing the Current Screen of the Phone 648 Scenario B Placing a Call via Web User Interface 649 Server Redundancy 65...

Page 20: ...tion AEC 754 Background Noise Suppression BNS 755 Automatic Gain Control AGC 755 Voice Activity Detection VAD 755 Comfort Noise Generation CNG 757 Jitter Buffer 758 DTMF 762 Methods of Transmitting DTMF Digit 763 Suppress DTMF Display 768 Transfer via DTMF 770 Play Local DTMF Tone 772 Voice Quality Monitoring VQM 773 RTCP XR 774 VQ RTCPXR 775 Configuring Security Features 793 User and Administrato...

Page 21: ...mware and Upgrading Issues 857 Provisioning Issues 858 System Log Issues 859 Resetting Issues 859 Rebooting Issues 863 Protocols and Ports Issues 866 Password Issues 869 Logo Issues 869 Power and Startup Issues 869 Other Issues 870 Appendix 873 Appendix A Glossary 873 Appendix B Time Zones 875 Appendix C Trusted Certificates 876 Appendix D Configuring DSS Keys 879 Appendix E Auto Provisioning Flow...

Page 22: ...ccessful Call Setup Called User is Busy 923 Unsuccessful Call Setup Called User Does Not Answer 925 Successful Call Setup and Call Hold 927 Successful Call Setup and Call Waiting 930 Call Transfer without Consultation 934 Call Transfer with Consultation 938 Always Call Forward 943 Busy Call Forward 945 No Answer Call Forward 948 Call Conference 951 Index 956 ...

Page 23: ...ks delivering excellent voice quality The high resolution graphic display supplies content in multiple languages for system status call log and directory access IP phones also support advanced functionalities including LDAP Busy Lamp Field Sever Redundancy and Network Conference IP phones comply with the SIP standard RFC 3261 and they can only be used within a network that supports this model of p...

Page 24: ... Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 2 the functional capability of your IP phone For more information on how to connect and use the expansion module refer to Yealink EXP specific user guide ...

Page 25: ... firmware of IP phones is available A call server is active and configured to receive and send SIP messages Yealink IP Phones in a Network Most Yealink IP phones connect physically through a Category 5E CAT5E cable to a 10 100 1000Mbps Ethernet LAN and send and receive all data using the same packet based technology Some phones for example SIP T48G can connect to the wireless network Since the IP ...

Page 26: ... phones The following shows an example of a network setup Initialization Process Overview The initialization process of the IP phone is responsible for network connectivity and operation of the IP phone in your local network Once you connect your IP phone to the network and to an electrical supply the IP phone begins its initialization process ...

Page 27: ...or more information on configuring network parameters manually refer to Configuring Network Parameters Manually on page 18 Contacting the provisioning server If the IP phone is configured to obtain configurations from the provisioning server it will connect to the provisioning server download the boot file s and configuration file s during startup The IP phone will be able to resolve and update co...

Page 28: ...ted to the power and network the IP phone begins the initializing process by cycling through the following steps 1 The power indicator LED illuminates solid red 2 The message Welcome Initializing please wait appears on the LCD screen when the IP phone starts up 3 The main LCD screen displays the following Time and date Soft key labels 4 Press the OK key or press Menu Status to check the IP phone s...

Page 29: ...rea network design which varies by organization and Yealink IP phones can be configured to accommodate a number of network designs In order to get your IP phones running you must perform basic network setup such as IP address and subnet mask configuration You can configure the IPv4 or IPv6 network parameters for the phone You can also configure the appropriate security VLAN and or 802 1X authentic...

Page 30: ... methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure DHCP on the IP phone Parameter static network internet_port type Web User Interface Configure DHCP on the IP phone Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p network q load Phone User Interface Configure DHCP on the IP phone Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default static network internet_port type 0 or ...

Page 31: ...ress the Save soft key to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Press OK to reboot the phone Static DNS Static DNS address es can be configured and used even though DHCP is enabled Procedure Static DNS can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files y0000000000xx c fg Configure the static DNS feat...

Page 32: ...er the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic IPv4 Config Static DNS Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IPv4 Type DHCP Static DNS static network primary_dns IPv4 Address Blank Description Configures the primary IPv4 DNS server Example static network primary_dns 202 101 103 55 Note It works only if the value of th...

Page 33: ...sed via web user interface 1 Click on Network Basic 2 In the IPv4 Config block mark the DHCP radio box 3 In the Static DNS block mark the On radio box 4 Enter the desired values in the Primary DNS and Secondary DNS fields 5 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 6 Click OK to reboot the phone To configure static DNS when ...

Page 34: ...e Offset 2 Specify the offset of the client s subnet in seconds from Coordinated Universal Time UTC Router 3 Specify a list of IP addresses for routers on the client s subnet Time Server 4 Specify a list of time servers available to the client Domain Name Server 6 Specify a list of domain name servers available to the client Host Name 12 Specify the name of the client Domain Server 15 Specify the ...

Page 35: ...ion option 66 identify the TFTP server option 43 The IP phone can obtain the Auto Configuration Server ACS address by detecting option 43 during startup To obtain the server address via DHCP option make sure the DHCP option is properly configured on the phone The option must be in accordance with the one defined in the DHCP server Procedure DHCP Active can be configured using the following methods...

Page 36: ...Configures the custom DHCP option for requesting provisioning server address Multiple options are separated by commas Note It works only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision dhcp_option enable is set to 1 On Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision Custom Option 128 254 Phone User Interface None To configure the DHCP Active feature via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Auto P...

Page 37: ...erver make sure the DHCP Time feature is enabled at the web path Settings Time Date DHCP Time For more information on how to configure DHCP time feature refer to NTP Time Server on page 214 DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone This option specifies the host name of the client The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name based on RFC 2132 See RFC 1035 for character restriction...

Page 38: ...s The default value is SIP T48G For SIP T48S IP phones The default value is SIP T48S For SIP T46G IP phones The default value is SIP T46G For SIP T46S IP phones The default value is SIP T46S For SIP T42G IP phones The default value is SIP T42G For SIP T42S IP phones The default value is SIP T42S For SIP T41P IP phones The default value is SIP T41P For SIP T41S IP phones The default value is SIP T4...

Page 39: ...21_E2 For SIP T19P E2 IP phones The default value is SIP T19P_E2 For SIP T19 E2 IP phones The default value is SIP T19_E2 Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Features General Information DHCP Hostname Phone User Interface None To configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP phone via web user interface 1 Click on Features Gene...

Page 40: ...ask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Procedure Network parameters can be configured manually using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure network parameters of the IP phone manually Parameters static network internet_port type static network ip_address_mode static network internet_port ip static network internet_port mask static network internet_po...

Page 41: ...ork ip_address_mode 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the IP address mode 0 IPv4 1 IPv6 2 IPv4 IPv6 Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic Internet Port Mode IPv4 IPv6 Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IP Mode static network internet_port ip IPv4 Address Blank Description Co...

Page 42: ... Web User Interface Network Basic IPv4 Config Static IP Address Subnet Mask Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IPv4 Type Static IP Subnet Mask static network internet_port gateway IPv4 Address Blank Description Configures the IPv4 default gateway Example static network internet_port gateway 192 168 1 254 Note It works only if the value of the parameter stati...

Page 43: ...es the secondary IPv4 DNS server Example static network secondary_dns 202 101 103 54 Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network ip_address_mode is set to 0 IPv4 or 2 IPv4 IPv6 and static network internet_port type is set to 2 Static IP Address If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic IPv4 Config Stati...

Page 44: ...ss Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port 2 Press or to select IPv4 or IPv4 IPv6 from the IP Mode field 3 Press the Save soft key to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Press OK to reboot the phone To configure a static IPv4 address via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port ...

Page 45: ...common transmission parameters for example speed and duplex mode to transmit voice or data over Ethernet This process entails devices first sharing transmission capabilities and then selecting the highest performance transmission mode supported by both You can configure the Internet port and PC port on the IP phone to automatically negotiate during the transmission Half duplex Half duplex transmis...

Page 46: ...23G IP phones Procedure The transmission methods of Ethernet ports can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx c fg Configure the transmission methods of the Ethernet ports Parameters static network internet_port speed_duplex static network pc_port speed_duplex Web User Interface Configure the transmission methods of the Ethernet ports Naviga...

Page 47: ...one static network pc_port speed_duplex 0 1 2 3 4 or 5 0 Description Configures the transmission method of the PC port 0 Auto Negotiation 1 Full Duplex 10Mbps 2 Full Duplex 100Mbps 3 Half Duplex 10Mbps 4 Half Duplex 100Mbps 5 Full Duplex 1000Mbps only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T40G T29G T27G T23G IP phones Note It works only if the value of the parameter static netw...

Page 48: ...to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 5 Click OK to reboot the phone Configuring PC Port Mode The PC port is used to connect a PC You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phone Procedure PC port mode can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the PC port Par...

Page 49: ... to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network PC Port PC Port Active Phone User Interface None To enable the PC port via web user interface 1 Click on Network PC Port 2 Select Auto Negotiation from the pull down list of PC Port Active 3 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Click OK to reboot the phone To ...

Page 50: ...ne s web user interface IP phones support both HTTP and HTTPS protocols for accessing the web user interface This can be disabled when it is not needed or when it poses a security threat For more information on accessing the web user interface refer to Web User Interface on page 98 HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP IP suite of protocols HTTPS is a web protocol that encryp...

Page 51: ...cfg Configure the web access type HTTP port and HTTPS port Parameters static wui http_enable static network port http static wui https_enable static network port https Web User Interface Configure the web access type HTTP port and HTTPS port Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p network adv q load Phone User Interface Configure the web access type HTTP port and HTTPS port Details of Configurat...

Page 52: ...user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP protocol Note Please take care when choosing an alternate port If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced Web Server HTTP Port 1 65535 Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network Web Server HTTP Port static wui https_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables o...

Page 53: ...1 65535 Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network Web Server HTTPS Port To configure web server type via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of HTTP 3 Enter the desired HTTP port number in the HTTP Port 1 65535 field 4 Select the desired value from the pull down list of HTTPS 5 Enter the desired HTTPS port number...

Page 54: ...than wired network Wi Fi feature is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones When the Wi Fi feature is enabled the IP phone will automatically scan the available wireless networks All the available wireless networks will display in scanning list on the LCD screen You can store up to 5 frequently used wireless networks on your phone and specify the priority...

Page 55: ...ettings Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p netwo rk wifi q load Phone User Interface Configure Wi Fi feature Configure the Wi Fi settings Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static wifi enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the Wi Fi feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T...

Page 56: ... wireless access points Note It works only if the value of the parameter static wifi enable is set to 1 Enabled It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones Web User Interface Network Wi Fi SSID Phone User Interface Menu Basic Wi Fi Wi Fi On Known Network press Add SSID or Menu Basic Wi Fi Wi Fi On Known Network Option Edit SSID static wifi X priority X ...

Page 57: ...f the parameter static wifi X security_mode is set to WEP the permitted value of this parameter is WEP If the value of the parameter static wifi X security_mode is set to other values the permitted values of this parameter are TKIP AES or TKIP AES Note It works only if the value of the parameter static wifi enable is set to 1 Enabled It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S ...

Page 58: ...P phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static wifi X eap_user_name X ranges from 1 to 5 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the EAP authentication username of the wireless network X Note It works only if the value of the parameter static wifi enable is set to 1 Enabled static wifi X security_mode is set to WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP and the value of the parameter ...

Page 59: ...bles or disable the IP phone to display the Wi Fi scanning prompt after connecting Wi Fi USB dongle WF40 to the IP phone 0 Disabled the IP phone will enable the Wi Fi feature and try to connect to the known wireless network according to the priority automatically But if the IP phone fails to connect to any known wireless network the IP phone will still display the Wi Fi scanning prompt when connec...

Page 60: ...d If you select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 1 Select the desired value TKIP AES or TKIP AES from the pull down list of the Cipher Type 2 Enter the desired password in the PSK field If you select WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP 1 Select the desired value TKIP AES or TKIP AES from the pull down list of the Cipher Type 2 Enter the desired username in the User Name field 3 Enter the desired password in the PSK field 5 Cl...

Page 61: ...LAN settings obtained from your gateway router to configure this WLAN Profile on the IP phone Do the following a If you select None or WEP from the pull down list of Security Mode Enter the profile name SSID and WPA shared key in the corresponding fields b If you select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the pull down list of Security Mode Select the desired Cipher type TKIP AES or TKIP AES from the pull do...

Page 62: ... daisy chained to an IP phone and the connection for both PC and IP phone to be trunked through the same physical Ethernet cable In addition to manual configuration the IP phone also supports automatic discovery of VLAN via LLDP CDP or DHCP The assignment takes effect in this order assignment via LLDP CDP manual configuration then assignment via DHCP For more information on VLAN refer to VLAN Feat...

Page 63: ...ectly connected LLDP enabled switch The IP phones can also receive LLDP packets from the connected switch When the application type is voice IP phones decide whether to update the VLAN configurations obtained from the LLDP packets When the VLAN configurations on the IP phones are different from the ones sent by the switch the IP phones perform an update and reboot This allows the IP phones to be p...

Page 64: ...Menu Advanced default password admin Network LLDP LLDP Status static network lldp packet_interval Integer from 1 to 3600 60 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the IP phone to send the LLDP Linker Layer Discovery Protocol request Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network lldp enable is set to 1 Enabled If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to ma...

Page 65: ...nes to receive and or transmit device related information from to directly connected devices on the network that are also using the protocol and store the information about other devices If the CDP feature is enabled on IP phones the IP phones will periodically advertise their own information to the directly connected CDP enabled switch The IP phones can also receive CDP packets from the connected...

Page 66: ... Interface Network Advanced CDP Active Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network CDP CDP Status static network cdp packet_interval Integer from 1 to 3600 60 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the IP phone to send the CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol request Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network cdp enable is set to 1 Enabled If you chan...

Page 67: ... pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 5 Press OK to reboot the phone Manual Configuration for VLAN in the Wired Network VLAN is disabled on IP phones by default You can configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually Before configuring VLAN on the IP phone you need to obtain the VLAN ID from your network administrator Procedure VLAN can be configured using ...

Page 68: ... Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced VLAN WAN Port Active Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN WAN Port VLAN Status static network vlan internet_port_vid Integer from 1 to 4094 1 Description Configures VLAN ID for the Internet port Note It works only if the value of the param...

Page 69: ...bles or disables VLAN for the PC port 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network pc_port enable is set to 1 Auto Negotiation If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced VLAN PC Port Active Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN PC Port VLAN Status s...

Page 70: ...atic network vlan pc_port_enable is set to 1 Enabled If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced VLAN PC Port Priority Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN PC Port Priority To configure VLAN for Internet port via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced 2 In the WAN Port block selec...

Page 71: ...ace 1 Press Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN WAN Port or PC Port 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the VLAN Status field 3 Enter the VLAN ID 1 4094 in the VID Number field 4 Enter the priority value 0 7 in the Priority field 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a rebo...

Page 72: ...ameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static network vlan dhcp_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables DHCP VLAN discovery feature on the IP phone 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced VLAN DHCP VLAN Active Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN...

Page 73: ...ired option in the Option 1 255 field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 5 Click OK to reboot the phone To configure DHCP VLAN discovery via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Advanced default password admin Network VLAN DHCP VLAN 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the DHCP VLAN field ...

Page 74: ...v6 or by manually entering an IP address Ensure that your network environment supports IPv6 Contact your ISP for more information IPv6 Address Assignment Method Supported IPv6 address assignment methods Manual Assignment An IPv6 address and other configuration parameters for example DNS server for the IP phone can be statically configured by an administrator Stateless Address Autoconfiguration SLA...

Page 75: ... or SLAAC If the SLAAC server is not working the IP phone will try to obtain the IPv6 address and other network settings via DHCPv6 Procedure IPv6 can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure the IPv6 address assignment method Parameters static network ip_address_mode static network ipv6_internet_port type static network ipv6_internet_por...

Page 76: ...mode 0 IPv4 1 IPv6 2 IPv4 IPv6 Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic Internet Port Mode IPv4 IPv6 Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IP Mode static network ipv6_internet_port type 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the Internet port type for IPv6 0 DHCP 1 Static IP Address Note...

Page 77: ...one User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IPv6 Type DHCP Static DNS static network ipv6_internet_port ip IPv6 address Blank Description Configures the IPv6 address Example static network ipv6_internet_port ip 2026 1234 1 1 215 65ff fe1f caa Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network ip_address_mode is set to 1 IPv6 or 2 IPv4 IPv6 and static netwo...

Page 78: ...te It works only if the value of the parameter static network ip_address_mode is set to 1 IPv6 or 2 IPv4 IPv6 and static network ipv6_internet_port type is set to 1 Static IP Address If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic IPv6 Config Static IP Address Default Gateway Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password a...

Page 79: ...he IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Basic IPv6 Config Static IP Address Secondary DNS Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IPv6 Type Static IP Sec DNS Or Menu Advanced default password admin Network WAN Port IPv6 Type DHCP Static DNS Enabled Sec DNS static network ipv6_icmp_v6 enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or...

Page 80: ...one To configure IPv6 address assignment method via web user interface 1 Click on Network Basic 2 Select the desired address mode IPv6 or IPv4 IPv6 from the pull down list of Mode IPv4 IPv6 3 In the IPv6 Config block mark the DHCP or the Static IP Address radio box If you mark the Static IP Address radio box configure the IPv6 address and other configuration parameters in the corresponding fields ...

Page 81: ...ure the static DNS address in the corresponding fields 4 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 5 Click OK to reboot the phone To configure SLAAC feature via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced ...

Page 82: ...desired IPv6 address assignment method from the Type field If you select the Static IP configure the IPv6 address and other network parameters in the corresponding fields 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 6 Press OK to reboot the phone To configure static DNS when DHCP is used via phone user interface 1 P...

Page 83: ...vides a virtual point to point connection while TUN simulates a network layer device and provides a virtual network segment IP phones use OpenVPN to achieve VPN feature To prevent disclosure of private information tunnel endpoints must authenticate each other before secure VPN tunnel is established After VPN feature is configured properly on the IP phone the IP phone acts as a VPN client and uses ...

Page 84: ...Parameters static network vpn_enable static openvpn url Web User Interface Configure VPN feature and upload a TAR file to the IP phone Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p ne twork adv q load Phone User Interface Configure VPN feature Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static network vpn_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables OpenVPN feature on th...

Page 85: ...To upload a TAR file and configure VPN via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced 2 Click Browse to locate the TAR file from the local system 3 Click Upload to upload the TAR file The web user interface prompts the message Import config 4 In the VPN block select the desired value from the pull down list of Active 5 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the ...

Page 86: ... only one public IP address for complete companies They configure NAT to advertise the IP address for the entire network to the outside world This can reduce the need for a large number of public IP addresses NAT is essentially a translation table that maps public IP address and port combinations to internal private ones NAT ensures security since each outgoing or incoming request must first go th...

Page 87: ...ques that establish and maintain IP connections traversing NAT gateways typically required for client to client networking applications especially for VoIP deployments Yealink IP phones support three NAT traversal techniques manual NAT STUN and ICE If manual NAT and STUN are all enabled the IP phone will use the manually configured external IP address for NAT traversal The TURN protocol is used as...

Page 88: ...s to remote parties The protocol requires assistance from a third party network server STUN server usually located on public Internet The IP phone can be configured to act as a STUN client to send exploratory STUN messages to the STUN server The STUN server uses those messages to determine the public IP address and port used and then informs the client Capturing packets after you enable the STUN f...

Page 89: ...ate bandwidth for calls Although TURN will almost always provide connectivity to a client it comes at high cost to the provider of the TURN server Therefore other mechanisms such as STUN or direct connectivity will be preferred when possible ICE Interactive Communications Establishment ICE described in RFC 5245 is a technique for Network Address Translator NAT traversal for UDP based media streams...

Page 90: ...isabled the port number shows in the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages If NAT is enabled the phone uses the NAT port number and NAT IP address in the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages but still use the configured source port Procedure NAT traversal can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files y0000000000xx c fg Configure STUN feature an...

Page 91: ...figure STUN feature and STUN server on a phone basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p net work nat q load Configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p setti ngs sip q load Configure NAT traversal on a per line basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p acco unt register q load acc 0 Phone User Interface Configure STUN feature and STUN server on ...

Page 92: ...assword admin Network NAT NAT Status static sip nat_stun server IP address or domain name Blank Description Configures the IP address or the domain name of the STUN Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs server Example sip nat_stun server 218 107 220 201 Note It works only if the value of the parameter static sip nat_stun enable is set to 1 Enabled If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot ...

Page 93: ... Description Enables or disables the NAT traversal for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 STUN it works only if the value of the parameter static sip nat_stun enable is set to 1 Enabled 2 Manual NAT it works only if the value of the parameter network static_nat enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Register NAT Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Accounts NAT Sta...

Page 94: ...he change take effect Web User Interface Network NAT Nat Manual IP Address Phone User Interface None static ice enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the ICE Interactive Connectivity Establishment feature on the IP phone 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note To use ICE feature you have to configure the STUN and or TURN server address in advance If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot t...

Page 95: ...ed If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network NAT TURN TURN Server Phone User Interface None static sip nat_turn port Integer from 1 to 65535 3478 Description Configures the port of the TURN Traversal Using Relays around NAT server Example sip nat_turn port 3478 Note It works only if the value of the parameter static sip nat_turn...

Page 96: ... User Interface None static sip nat_turn password String Blank Description Configures the password to authenticate to the TURN Traversal Using Relays around NAT server Example sip nat_turn password yealink1105 Note It works only if the value of the parameter static sip nat_turn enable is set to 1 Enabled If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User ...

Page 97: ... T19 P E2 X 1 To configure NAT traversal and STUN server via web user interface 1 Click on Network NAT 2 In the STUN block select the desired value from the pull down list of Active 3 Enter the IP address or the domain name of the STUN server in the STUN Server field 4 Enter the port of the STUN server in the STUN Port 1024 65000 field 5 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to p...

Page 98: ...o reboot the phone To configure ICE feature via web user interface 1 Click on Network NAT 2 In the ICE block select the desired value from the pull down list of Active 3 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Click OK to reboot the phone To configure NAT traversal for account via web user interface 1 Click on Account Re...

Page 99: ...down list of NAT 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port via web user interface 1 Click on Settings SIP 2 Enter the desired local SIP port in the Local SIP Port field 3 Enter the desired TLS SIP port in the TLS SIP Port field ...

Page 100: ...nt via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Advanced default password admin Accounts 2 Press or to select the desired account and then press the Enter soft key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the NAT Status field 4 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Keep Alive IP phones can send keep alive packets to the NAT device for keeping the communication port open P...

Page 101: ...t Advanced Keep Alive Type Phone User Interface None account X nat udp_update_time 1 Integer from 15 to 2147483647 30 Description Configures the keep alive interval in seconds for a specific account Example account 1 nat udp_update_time 30 Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X nat udp_update_enable is set to 1 2 or 3 Web User Interface Account Advanced Keep Alive Interval Seco...

Page 102: ...lient is behind a Network Address Translation NAT or firewall So a new parameter rport for the Via header field is required Rport described in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server sends the response back to the source port from which the request came Rport feature depends on support from a SIP server Procedure Rport feature can be configured using the following methods Central Provi...

Page 103: ...m the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of RPort 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS is the ability to provide different priorities for different packets in the network allowing the transport of traffic with special requirements QoS guarantees are important for applications that require fixed bit rate and are...

Page 104: ...ng Expedited Forwarding PHB the key ingredient in DiffServ model for providing a low loss low latency low jitter and assured bandwidth service Assured Forwarding PHB defines a method by which BAs Bandwidth Allocations can be given different forwarding assurances Default PHB specifies that a packet marked with a DSCP value of 000000 gets the traditional best effort service from a DS compliant node ...

Page 105: ...s audiotos Integer from 0 to 63 46 Description Configures the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point for voice packets The default DSCP value for RTP packets is 46 Expedited Forwarding Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced Voice QoS 0 63 Phone User Interface None static network qos signaltos Integer from 0 to ...

Page 106: ...in the Voice QoS 0 63 field 3 Enter the desired value in the SIP QoS 0 63 field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 5 Click OK to reboot the phone 802 1X Authentication IEEE 802 1X authentication is an IEEE standard for Port based Network Access Control PNAC part of the IEEE 802 1 group of networking protocols It off...

Page 107: ...rk Yealink IP phones support the following protocols for 802 1X authentication EAP MD5 EAP TLS requires Device and CA certificates requires no password EAP PEAP MSCHAPv2 requires CA certificates EAP TTLS EAP MSCHAPv2 requires CA certificates EAP PEAP GTC requires CA certificates EAP TTLS EAP GTC requires CA certificates EAP FAST supports EAP In Band provisioning requires CA certificates if the pro...

Page 108: ...ation Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static network 802_1x mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 0 Description Configures the 802 1x authentication method 0 EAP None 802 1x authentication is not required 1 EAP MD5 2 EAP TLS 3 EAP PEAP MSCHAPv2 4 EAP TTLS EAP MSCHAPv2 5 EAP PEAP GTC 6 EAP TTLS EAP GTC 7 EAP FAST Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot t...

Page 109: ...e static network 802_1x anonymous_identity String within 512 characters Blank Description Configures the anonymous identity user name for 802 1X authentication It is used for constructing a secure tunnel for 802 1X authentication Example static network 802_1x anonymous_identity anonymous Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network 802_1x mode is set to 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 If you cha...

Page 110: ...effect Web User Interface Network Advanced 802 1x MD5 Password Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Network 802 1x MD5 Password static network 802_1x root_cert_url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the CA certificate Example static network 802_1x root_cert_url http 192 168 1 10 ca pem Note It works only if the value of the parameter stati...

Page 111: ... Advanced 802 1x Device Certificates Phone User Interface None To configure the 802 1X authentication via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced 2 In the 802 1x block select the desired protocol from the pull down list of 802 1x Mode a If you select EAP MD5 1 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 2 Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field b If ...

Page 112: ...o select the desired client pem or cer certificate from your local system 6 Click Upload to upload the certificates c If you select EAP PEAP MSCHAPv2 1 Optional Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field 2 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 3 Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field 4 In the CA Certificates fiel...

Page 113: ...e for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field 2 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 3 Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field 4 In the CA Certificates field click Browse to select the desired CA certificate pem crt cer or der from your local system 5 Click Upload to upload the certificate ...

Page 114: ...the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field 4 In the CA Certificates field click Browse to select the desired CA certificate pem crt cer or der from your local system 5 Click Upload to upload the certificate f If you select EAP TTLS EAP GTC 1 Optional Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field 2 Enter the user name for authentication in the Ident...

Page 115: ...lect the desired value from the pull down list of Provisioning Mode 2 Optional Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field 3 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 4 Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field 5 Optional In the CA Certificates field click Browse to select the desired CA certificate pem crt cer or der fr...

Page 116: ...twork 802 1x 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the 802 1x Mode field a If you select EAP MD5 1 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 2 Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field b If you select EAP TLS 1 Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field 2 Leave the MD5 Password field blank c If you select EAP P...

Page 117: ...figuration Files and Resource Files Setting Up a Provisioning Server Upgrading Firmware Keeping User Personalized Settings after Auto Provisioning Provisioning Points to Consider If you are provisioning a mass of IP phones we recommend you to use central provisioning method as your primary configuration method For more information on central provisioning refer to Central Provisioning on page 97 A ...

Page 118: ...methods settings you make using a higher priority provisioning method override settings made using a lower priority provisioning method The precedence order for configuration parameter changes is as follows highest to lowest Note The priority mechanism takes effect only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom protect is set to 1 For more information on this parameter refer to Co...

Page 119: ...or more information on configuration files refer to Configuration Files on page 101 IP phones can obtain the provisioning server address during startup Then IP phones download boot files and configuration files from the provisioning server resolve and update the configurations written in configuration files This entire process is called auto provisioning For more information on auto provisioning r...

Page 120: ...ace can vary An administrator or a user can configure IP phones via web user interface but accessing the web user interface requires password The default user name and password for the administrator are both admin case sensitive The default user name and password for the user are both user case sensitive For more information on configuring passwords refer to User and Administrator Passwords on pag...

Page 121: ...an reference some configuration files that contain parameters in the boot files to be acquired by all your phones and specify the download sequence of these configuration files Yealink supports two types of boot files common boot file and MAC Oriented boot file During auto provisioning the IP phone first tries to download the MAC Oriented boot file refer to MAC Oriented Boot File and then download...

Page 122: ...the provisioning server in sequence The parameters in the new downloaded configuration files will override the duplicate parameters in files downloaded earlier overwrite_mode 1 means overwrite mode is enabled The overwrite mode will be applied to the configuration files specified to download If the value of a parameter in configuration files is left blank or a parameter in configuration files is d...

Page 123: ... of Common CFG File MAC Oriented CFG File MAC local CFG File Custom CFG File Common CFG File Common CFG file named y0000000000xx cfg contains parameters that affect the basic operation of the IP phone such as language and volume It will be effectual for all IP phones of the same model The common CFG file has a fixed name The following table lists the name of the common CFG file for each IP phone m...

Page 124: ...DSS keys This file generates only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom protect is set to 1 The MAC local CFG file is also named after the MAC address the bar code label on the back of the IP phone or on the outside of the box of the IP phone For example if the MAC address of an IP phone is 00156574B150 the name of the MAC local CFG file is 00156574b150 local cfg lowercase Not...

Page 125: ...he provisioning server each time the file updates For more information refer to the parameter static auto_provision custom sync described in the section Configuration Parameters on page 122 Custom CFG File You can create some new CFG files for example sip cfg account cfg containing any combination of configuration parameters This especially useful when you want to apply a set of features or settin...

Page 126: ...ion on resource files refer to Obtaining Boot Files Configuration Files Resource Files on page 105 If you want to delete resource files from a phone at a later date for example if you are giving the phone to a new user you can reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings For more information refer to Resetting Issues on page 859 ...

Page 127: ...customize the download sequence of the configuration files during auto provisioning For more information refer to Boot Files on page 99 Configuration Files Common CFG File Common cfg Allow you to deploy and maintain a mass of Yealink IP phones For more information refer to Common CFG File and MAC Oriented CFG File on page 102 MAC Oriented CFG File MAC cfg Custom CFG Files For example sip cfg accou...

Page 128: ... 242 Replace Rule Template dialplan xml Allows you to customize multiple replace rules for IP phone dial plan For more information refer to Customizing Replace Rule Template File on page 269 Dial Now Template dialnow xml Allows you to customize multiple dial now rules for IP phone dial plan For more information refer to Customizing Dial Now Template File on page 275 Softkey Layout Template CallFai...

Page 129: ...fy multiple contacts at a time for your IP phone For more information refer to Customizing a Local Contact File on page 315 Remote Phone Book Template Department xml Menu xml Allows you to add or modify multiple remote contacts for your IP phone For more information refer to Customizing Remote Phone Book Template File on page 512 Screen Saver Template CustomScreenSaver xml Allows you to customize ...

Page 130: ...you will edit according to the table introduced above For some features you can customize the filename as required The following table lists the special characters supported by Yealink IP phones Server HTTP HTTPS TFTP FTP Windows Support _ including space Not Support Support _ including space Not Support Linux Support _ including space Not Support Support _ including space Not Support Setting Up a...

Page 131: ...ge 332 Supported Provisioning Protocols IP phones perform the auto provisioning function of uploading log files if configured uploading contact files if configured downloading boot files downloading configuration files downloading resource files and upgrading firmware The transfer protocol is used to download files from the provisioning server IP phones support several transport protocols for prov...

Page 132: ... Files on page 101 The boot files can only be used by the IP phones running firmware version 81 or later The configuration files supplied with each firmware release must be used with that release Otherwise configurations may not take effect and the IP phone will behave without exception Before you configure parameters in the configuration files Yealink recommends that you create new configuration ...

Page 133: ...ace after startup PnP PnP feature allows IP phones to discover the provisioning server address by broadcasting the PnP SUBSCRIBE message during startup DHCP DHCP option can be used to provide the address or URL of the provisioning server to IP phones When the IP phone requests an IP address using the DHCP protocol the resulting response may contain option 66 or the custom option if configured that...

Page 134: ...IP T27P 45 x x x rom 45 82 0 20 rom SIP T27G 69 x x x rom 69 82 0 20 rom SIP T23P G 44 x x x rom 44 82 0 20 rom SIP T21 P E2 52 x x x rom 52 82 0 20 rom SIP T19 P E2 53 x x x rom 53 82 0 20 rom Note Upgrading Firmware from the Provisioning Server IP phones support using FTP TFTP HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files and firmware from the provisioning server and then upgrade firm...

Page 135: ...weekly begin_time static auto_provision weekly end_time static auto_provision weekly dayofweek static auto_provision flexible enable static auto_provision flexible interval static auto_provision flexible begin_time static auto_provision flexible end_time static auto_provision prompt enable Specify the access URL of firmware Parameter static firmware url Web User Interface Configure the way for the...

Page 136: ...s the repeatedly feature to on or off 0 Off 1 On Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision Repeatedly Phone User Interface None static auto_provision repeat minutes Integer from 1 to 43200 1440 Description Configures the interval in minutes for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process repeatedly Note It works only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision repeat enable is se...

Page 137: ...is set to 1 On Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision Weekly Upgrade Interval 0 12week Phone User Interface None static auto_provision inactivity_time_expire Integer from 0 to 120 0 Description Configures the delay time in minutes to perform an auto provisioning process when the IP phone is inactive at regular week If it is set to 0 the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at ran...

Page 138: ...Settings Auto Provision Time Phone User Interface None static auto_provision weekly end_time Time from 00 00 to 23 59 00 00 Description Configures the ending time of the day for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process weekly Note It works only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision weekly enable is set to 1 On Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision Time Phone User Int...

Page 139: ...one User Interface None static auto_provision flexible enable 0 or 1 0 Description Triggers the flexible feature to on or off 0 Off 1 On the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at random between a starting time configured by the parameter static auto_provision flexible begin_time and an ending time configured by the parameter static auto_provision flexible end_time on a random day w...

Page 140: ...rks only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision flexible enable is set to 1 On Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision Flexible Time Phone User Interface None static auto_provision flexible end_time Time from 00 00 to 23 59 Blank Description Configures the ending time of the day for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process at random If it is left blank or set to a speci...

Page 141: ...nabled Note If the IP phone performs the auto provision when receiving a SIP NOTIFY message which contains the header Event check sync the IP phone will display the prompt message no matter whether the configuration is updated Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static firmware url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the firmware file Example stat...

Page 142: ...onfiguration files stored on the provisioning server during startup and then will download firmware from the server Upgrading Firmware via Web User Interface To manually upgrade firmware via web user interface you need to store firmware to your local system in advance To upgrade firmware manually via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Upgrade 2 Click Browse to locate the required firmware from...

Page 143: ...sioning These specific scenarios are applicable to Yealink IP phones The following demonstrated specific scenarios are taking SIP T46G IP phones as example for reference Note Do not close and refresh the browser when the IP phone is upgrading firmware via web user interface Yealink IP phones support FTP TFTP HTTP and HTTPS protocols for uploading the MAC local cfg file This section takes the TFTP ...

Page 144: ...ce central provisioning factory defaults takes effect only if the value of this parameter is set to 1 Enabled If the value of the parameter overwrite_mode is set to 1 in the boot file the value of this parameter will be forced to set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static auto_provision custom sync 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to upload the M...

Page 145: ... only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom sync is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None For more information on how to configure these parameters in different scenarios refer to the following introduced scenarios Scenario A Keep user personalized configuration settings The administrator wishes to upgrade firmware from the old version to the lates...

Page 146: ...the IP Phone to Perform the Auto Provisioning section in Yealink_SIP_IP_Phones_Auto_Provisioning_Guide_V81 During auto provisioning the IP phone first downloads the y000000000028 cfg file and then downloads firmware from the root directory of the provisioning server The IP phone reboots to complete firmware upgrade and then starts auto provisioning process again which is triggered by phone reboot ...

Page 147: ...ne are also updated The IP phone starts up successfully and personalized settings are kept after auto provisioning When a user customizes feature configurations via web phone user interface the IP phone will save the personalized settings to the 001565770984 local cfg file on the IP phone only Note If the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom protect is set to 0 the personalized sett...

Page 148: ...sword admin Reset Config 2 Select Reset local settings The LCD screen prompts Reset local cfg settings 3 Press the OK soft key The LCD screen prompts Reset local settings Please wait To clear personalized configuration settings via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Upgrade The Reset local settings option on the web phone user interface appears only if the value of the parameter static auto_pr...

Page 149: ...the IP phone will be reset to factory defaults Note Scenario C Keep user personalized settings after factory reset The IP phone requires factory reset when it has a breakdown but the user wishes to keep personalized settings of the phone after factory reset Scenario Conditions SIP T46G IP phone MAC 001565770984 Provisioning server URL tftp 192 168 1 211 static auto_provision custom sync 1 Note You...

Page 150: ...ry to reset the phone The web user interface prompts Do you want to reset to factory 3 Click OK After startup all configurations of the phone will be reset to factory defaults So the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom sync will be reset to 0 Configurations in the 001565770984 local cfg file saved on the IP phone will also be cleared But configurations in the 001565770984 local cfg...

Page 151: ...t the local configuration file to check the personalized settings of the phone configured by the user or import the local configuration file to configure or change settings of the phone Scenario Conditions SIP T46G IP phone MAC 001565770984 The current firmware of the phone is 28 82 0 20 or later Provisioning server URL tftp 192 168 1 211 Note Scenario Operations To export local configuration file...

Page 152: ... The configurations only in the existing local configuration file will not be cleared As a result the configurations in the new 001565770984 local cfg file contain the configurations only in the existing local configuration file and those in the imported 001565770984 local cfg file And this new 001565770984 local cfg file will be saved to the phone flash and take effect Note If the value of the pa...

Page 153: ...ast Wallpaper Transparency Screen Saver Power Saving Backlight Idle Clock Bluetooth Page Switch Key Enable Page Tips Page Tips for Expansion Module Label Length Account Registration Multiple Line Keys per Account Multiple Call Appearances Call Display Display Method on Dialing Web Server Type Time and Date Language Input Method Logo Customization Softkey Layout Key As Send Send Tone Key Tone Dial ...

Page 154: ...tory Live Dialpad Speed Dial Call Waiting Auto Redial Auto Answer IP Direct Auto Answer Allow IP Call Accept SIP Trust Server Only Call Completion Anonymous Call Anonymous Call Rejection Do Not Disturb DND Busy Tone Delay Return Code When Refuse Early Media 180 Ring Workaround Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog SIP Session Timer Session Timer Ignoring Incoming Calls Call Hold Call Forward Call Transfer ...

Page 155: ...inging Timeout Send user phone SIP Send MAC SIP Send Line Reserve in User Name Password Dial Unregister When Reboot 100 Reliable Retransmission Reboot in Talking Answer By Hand USB Recording CSTA Control Quick Login CFG File Version Information Customization Power Indicator LED Power indicator LED indicates power status and phone status You can configure the power indicator LED light behavior in t...

Page 156: ...ld_and_held_power_led_flash_enable phone_setting talk_and_dial_power_led_enable phone_setting missed_call_power_led_flash enable Web User Interface Configure the power indicator LED Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features powerl ed q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting common_power_led_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables...

Page 157: ... Enabled power indicator LED fast flashes 300ms yellow Web User Interface Features Power LED Ringing Power Light Flash Phone User Interface None phone_setting mail_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27 P T2...

Page 158: ...bled power indicator LED does not flash 1 Enabled power indicator LED fast flashes 300ms yellow Web User Interface Features Power LED Mute Power Light Flash Phone User Interface None phone_setting hold_and_held_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when a call is placed on hold or is held For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41...

Page 159: ...n Phone User Interface None phone_setting missed_call_power_led_flash enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone misses a call For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27 P T27G T23P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones 0 Disabled power indicator LED does not flash 1 Enabled power indicator LED slowly flashes 1000ms red Fo...

Page 160: ...desired value from the pull down list of Hold Held Power Light Flash 7 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Talk Dial Power Light On 8 Select the desired value from the pull down list of MissCall Power Light Flash 9 Click Confirm to accept the change Notification Popups Notification popups feature allows the IP phone to display the pop up message box when it misses a call forwards a...

Page 161: ...etails of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features voice_mail_popup enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop up message box when it receives a new voice mail 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X display_mwi enable is set to 1 Enabled If the voice mail pop up message box disappears it won ...

Page 162: ...all_popup enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop up message box when it forwards an incoming call to other party 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features Notification Popups Display Forward Call Popup Phone User Interface None features text_message_popup enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop up message box w...

Page 163: ...layed on the LCD screen Adjusting the contrast to a comfortable level can optimize the screen viewing experience When configured properly contrast allows users to read the LCD s display with minimal eyestrain You can configure the LCD s contrast of SIP T40P G SIP T27P G SIP T23P G SIP T21 P E2 and SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXP20 connected to SIP T29G T27P T27G IP phones and EXP40 connected to SIP T48...

Page 164: ...ed EXP40 only For T29G IP phones it configures the LCD s contrast of the connected EXP20 only For T27P G IP phones it configures the LCD s contrast of the IP phone and the connected EXP20 For T40P T40G T23P T23G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 IP phones it configures the LCD s contrast of the IP phone Note We recommend that you set the contrast of the LCD screen to 6 as a more comfortable level It is not applic...

Page 165: ...ed Users can select an image from IP phone s built in background or customize wallpaper from personal pictures To set the custom wallpaper as the IP phone EXP50 background you need to upload the custom wallpaper to the IP phone in advance The wallpaper is only applicable to SIP T54S SIP T52S SIP T48G S SIP T46G S SIP T29G IP phones and EXP50 connected to the SIP T54S T52S IP phones expansion modul...

Page 166: ...ed Note The wallpaper image format must meet the following Phone Model Format Resolution Single File Size Note SIP T54S T52S jpg png bmp jpeg 4 2 megapixels 5MB 2MB of space should be reserved for the phone SIP T48G S 2 0 megapixels 5MB The wallpaper will display on the entire screen Note that the line key labels time and date icons and soft keys will display over the wallpaper while they are invi...

Page 167: ...rameter expansion_module backgrounds Specify the access URL of the custom wallpaper Parameter wallpaper_upload url Configure the wallpaper with DSSkey unfold Parameter phone_setting backgrounds_with_dsskey_u nfold Web User Interface Configure the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone Configure the wallpaper displayed on the expansion module Upload the custom wallpaper Configure the wallpaper with DS...

Page 168: ...xample wallpaper jpg Example phone_setting backgrounds Default jpg Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface Settings Preference Wallpaper Phone User Interface Menu Basic Display Wallpaper expansion_module backgrounds Refer to the following content Default exp50 j pg Description Configures the wallpaper displayed on the expansion module Permi...

Page 169: ...paper 800 480 Phone User Interface None phone_setting backgrounds_with_dsskey_unfold Refer to the following content Auto Description Configures the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone when the DSS key list is unfolded If it is set to Auto the IP phone will use the wallpaper selected for the idle screen configured by the parameter phone_setting backgrounds Permitted Values Auto Default jpg 01 jpg 0...

Page 170: ...Upload Wallpaper 800 480 field click Browse to locate the wallpaper image from your local system 3 Click Upload to upload the file The custom wallpaper appears in the pull down lists of Wallpaper and Wallpaper with DSSkey unfold To change the wallpaper via web user interface take SIP T48G IP phones for example 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select the desired wallpaper from the pull down list of...

Page 171: ...a web user interface take SIP T54S IP phones for example 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select the desired wallpaper from the pull down list of Wallpaper for expansion modules 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To change the wallpaper via phone user interface take SIP T48G IP phones for example 1 Tap Basic Display Wallpaper Dsskey Wallpaper 2 Tap or or press or to select the desired wallpaper ...

Page 172: ...t key to select the desired wait time from the Wallpaper field 3 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Transparency If you are using a custom image with a single color or complex background it may affect your experience of the idle screen display Users can choose an appropriate transparency for DSS key labels and status bar on the idle screen as required The transparency is only applicable ...

Page 173: ...er Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting idle_dsskey_and_title transparency 0 20 40 60 80 or 100 100 Description Configures the transparency of the DSS key labels and status bar on the idle screen for the IP phone If it is set to 0 the DSS key labels and status bar are non transparent Example phone_setting idle_dsskey_and_title transparency 80 Note It is also applicable when the DSS key...

Page 174: ...ture s as screen saver for the IP phone you need to upload the custom picture s in advance If multiple pictures are uploaded all pictures are displayed like a slide show when screen saver starts For SIP T54S T52S IP phones you can also set a custom picture stored in your USB flash drive as the screen saver In order to do this make sure the USB flash drive containing pictures is connected to your p...

Page 175: ... Saver XML Template File You can customize the screen saver XML template file to configure the IP phone whether to display following XML items on the screen saver Time and date Status icons Notifications Image only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones The display position of the XML items is configurable For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones you can also cu...

Page 176: ...ate file You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for screen saver XML template You can also obtain the screen saver XML template online http support yealink com documentFront forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage The following table lists description of each element in the template file Parameter Position Value Description YealinkIPPh oneCustomS creenSaver Root tag none The root element of the xml ...

Page 177: ...xt small 12 pt normal 18 pt double 24 pt large 28 pt horizontalAli gn SystemTime tag left middle right Horizontal position of the time and date verticalAlign SystemTime tag top middle bottom Vertical position of the time and date Color SystemTime tag white black red green brown blue magenta cyan lightgray darkgray lightred lightgreen yellow lightblue lightmagenta lightcyan or RGB values for exampl...

Page 178: ...isplayed on the LCD screen the exceeding characters will be displayed as ellipsis Note The SIP T48G S IP phones support displaying up to 11 lines of content SIP T54S T52S T46G T46S T29G T2 7G T27P IP phones support displaying up to 8 lines of content SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S T23P T2 3G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 IP phones support displaying up to 4 lines of content Size Line tag normal small double large Fo...

Page 179: ...s only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T4 6S T29G IP phones verticalAlign Image tag top middle bottom Vertical position of the image Note It works only if you do not configure InsertImageLineNum parameter or set the InsertImageLineNum parameter to 0 It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T4 6S T29G IP phones height Image tag integer The height in pixels of the company log...

Page 180: ...e access URL of the screen saver xml file in the configuration file Procedure Screen saver can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx c fg Configure the time to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts Parameter screensaver wait_time Configure the type of screen saver to display Parameter screensaver type Specify the access URL ...

Page 181: ...nekey X type programablekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X line programablekey X line expansion_module X key Y line linekey X value programablekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Configure the time to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts Configure th...

Page 182: ...res the time in seconds to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts 15 15s 30 30s 60 1min 120 2min 300 5min 600 10min 1800 30min 3600 1h 3200 2h 10800 3h 21600 6h Web User Interface Settings Preference Screensaver Wait Time Phone User Interface Menu Basic Display Screensaver Wait Time screensaver type 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the type of screen saver to display 0 System the L...

Page 183: ...e access URL of the custom screen saver image Example screensaver upload_url http 192 168 10 25 Screencapture jpg During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server 192 168 10 25 and downloads the screen saver image Screencapture jpg If you want to upload multiple screen saver images to the phone simultaneously you can configure as following screensaver uplo...

Page 184: ...r images screensaver delete http localhost all Delete a custom screen saver image for example Screencapture jpg screensaver delete http localhost Screencapture jpg Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S SIP T52S SIP T48G S SIP T46G S and SIP T29G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None screensaver display_clock enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to dis...

Page 185: ... applicable to SIP T54S SIP T52S SIP T48G S SIP T46G S and SIP T29G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None screensaver clock_move_interval Integer from 5 to 1200 600 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the IP phone to move the clock and icons when the screen saver starts Note It works only if the value of the parameter screensaver display_clock enable is set to ...

Page 186: ...1 programablekey X value 2 expansion_module X key Y value 3 String within 99 characters Description Configures the access URL of the screen saver xml file Example linekey 3 value http 192 168 1 1 CustomScreenSaver xml Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Value Phone User Interface Menu Featu...

Page 187: ...or SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X 1 15 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X 1 21 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 2 X is the programable key ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S ...

Page 188: ...reen saver appears in the pull down list of Screensaver The Screensaver field appears only if Screensaver Type is set to Custom To configure the access URL of the screen saver xml file via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select Server XML from the pull down list of Screensaver Type 3 Enter the URL of the screen saver xml file in the XML Browser URL field ...

Page 189: ... down list of Screensaver Type 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the screen saver wait time and screensaver display clock via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select the desired time from the pull down list of Screensaver Wait Time 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Screensaver Display Clock 4 Click Confirm to accept the change ...

Page 190: ... soft key to select the desired wait time from the Wait Time field 3 Optional Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Display Clock field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Screensaver Type field 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change To configure a XML Browser DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2...

Page 191: ... day s office hour for each day of the week You can configure power saving around your work schedule Idle TimeOut minutes Configures the period of time before the IP phone enters power saving mode You can configure different idle timeouts for office hours and off hours evenings and weekends You can also specify a separate timeout period that applies after you use the phone By default the Office Ho...

Page 192: ... timeout Parameters features power_saving office_hour idle_timeout features power_saving off_hour idle_timeout features power_saving user_input_ext idle_timeout Configure the flashing period of the power indicator LED in the power saving mode Parameters features power_saving power_led_flash on_time features power_saving power_led_flash off_time Web User Interface Configure the power saving feature...

Page 193: ...It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Settings Power Saving Power Saving Phone User Interface None features power_saving office_hour idle_timeout Integer from 1 to 960 960 Description Configures the time in minutes to wait in the idle state before the IP phone enters power saving mode during the office hours Example features power_saving office_hour idle_timeout 600 The...

Page 194: ...ger from 1 to 30 10 Description Configures the minimum time in minutes to wait in the idle state after using the phone before the IP phone enters power saving mode Example features power_saving user_input_ext idle_timeout 5 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Settings Power Saving User Input Extension Idle TimeOut Phone User Interface None features power_saving o...

Page 195: ...f it is set to 0 and the value of the parameter features power_saving power_led_flash off_time is not set to 0 the power indicator LED will be off when the IP phone enters the power saving mode Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features power_saving power_led_flash off_time 0 Integer from 100 to 10000 30...

Page 196: ...nsity of the LCD screen when the IP phone is inactive Backlight turns off quickly if a short backlight time is configured this may not give users enough time to read messages Backlight time is applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27P T27G T2 3P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones EXP40 connected to SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S IP phones and EXP20 connected to SIP T29G...

Page 197: ...50 T27P G EXP20 Configuration Files Web User Interface Phone User Interface Active Backlight Level Active Level Backlight Time T42G S T41P S T40P G T23P G T21 P E2 Configuration Files Web User Interface Phone User Interface Backlight Time Procedure Backlight can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx c fg Configure the backlight of the LCD s...

Page 198: ... T54S T52S IP phones and the connected EXP50 SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S IP phones and the connected EXP40 SIP T29G T27P T27G IP phones and the connected EXP20 Web User Interface Settings Preference Active Backlight Level Phone User Interface Menu Basic Display Backlight Active Level phone_setting inactive_backlight_level 0 or 1 1 Description Configures the intensity of the LCD screen when the phone i...

Page 199: ... 1min the intensity of the LCD screen will be changed when the IP phone has been inactivated for 60 seconds 120 2min 300 5min 600 10min 1800 30min For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G The default value is 0 For SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T27P T27G T23P T23G T21 P E2 The default value is 30 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Settings Preference Backl...

Page 200: ... key to select the desired time from the Backlight Time field 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Idle Clock Display Idle clock is displayed on the center of the idle screen by default You can hide the idle clock and the time and date are displayed on the right of the status bar It is only applicable to SIP T54S IP phones Procedure Idle clock can be configured using the following method...

Page 201: ...After connecting the Bluetooth Enabled mobile phone you can synchronize the mobile contacts to the IP phone For SIP T54S T52S IP phones you can also make and receive mobile calls on IP phone For more information refer to the Yealink phone specific user guide It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones You can personalize the Bluetooth device name for th...

Page 202: ...eatures bluetooth q load Phone User Interface Configure Bluetooth mode Configure the Bluetooth device name Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features bluetooth_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Triggers Bluetooth mode to on or off 0 Off 1 On Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones Web User Interface Features ...

Page 203: ...2S IP phones The default value is Yealink T42S For SIP T41S IP phones The default value is Yealink T41S For SIP T29G IP phones The default value is Yealink T29G For SIP T27G IP phones The default value is Yealink T27G Note It works only if the value of the parameter features bluetooth_enable is set to 1 On It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones Web...

Page 204: ...ter soft key The LCD screen displays the device name and MAC address The MAC address cannot be edited 5 Enter the desired name in the Device Name field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Page Switch Key The page switch key allows you to conveniently switch between pages of line keys on the phone Up to three pages are supported By default you can use the page switch key only if a line k...

Page 205: ...of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features keep_switch_page_key enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the line key in the bottom right of the phone to be fixed as a page switch key 0 Disabled the page icons appear only if a line key not located on the first page is assigned functionality Then you can use the line key in the bottom right to switch pages 1 E...

Page 206: ...ashing the line receives an incoming call on the non current page SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S T27P T27G Fast flashing The BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non current page The line receives an incoming call on the non current page Solid There is a parked call on the non current page Procedure Enable page tips can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configu...

Page 207: ...41S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Enable Page Tips Phone User Interface None To configure the page icon to indicate status via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Enable Page Tips 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Page Tips for Expansion Module You are allowed to configure the page switch key LED on the expansio...

Page 208: ...iguration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure page tips for the page switch keys for the expansion modules Parameters expansion_module page_tip blf_call_in enable expansion_module page_tip blf_call_in led Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default expansion_module page_tip blf_call_in enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disab...

Page 209: ...illuminates solid red for 300ms and then goes out for 300ms Note It works only if the value of the parameter expansion_module page_tip blf_call_in enable is set to 1 Enabled It is only applicable to EXP50 expansion modules connected to the SIP T54S T52S IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Label Length Label length allows IP phones to extend the display length of the line ke...

Page 210: ... 188 SIP T48G When label length feature is set to Extended For SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G IP phones the display length of the line key label is extended and the characters are displayed in one line SIP T46G For SIP T48G S IP phones the characters are displayed in two lines SIP T48G ...

Page 211: ...nfigure label length Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dsskey model 1 q load linepa ge 1 Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features config_dsskey_length 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the label length displayed on the idle LCD screen for the line key 0 Default 1 Extended 2 Mid range only applicable to SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Note It is o...

Page 212: ...licable to SIP T52S IP phones If you configure the phone to display 2 characters the display will match the rules below Label Short Label Description Any string or Blank Configured for example aLine1 Short Label has higher priority than Label If the value of Short Label is configured the value of Label is ignored Display the first two characters of the short label for example aL Configured for exa...

Page 213: ... Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure linekey length in short Parameter features config_dsskey_length shorte n Web User Interface Configure linekey length in short Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dsskey model 1 q load linepa ge 1 Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features config_dsskey_length shorten 0 or 1 1 Description Conf...

Page 214: ...e User Interface None To configure the linekey length in short via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Linekey Length in short 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Account Registration Registering an account makes it easier for the IP phones to receive an incoming call or dial an outgoing call Yealink IP phones support registering mul...

Page 215: ...be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure the SIP account registration information Parameters account X enable account X label account X display_name account X auth_name account X user_name account X password account X sip_server Y address account X sip_server Y port account X outbound_proxy_enable account X outbound_proxy Y address account...

Page 216: ...e account X 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Register Line Active Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Accounts Activation account X label 1 String within 99 characters Blank Description Optional Configures the label to be displayed on the LCD screen for a specific account Web User Interface Account Register Label Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default passw...

Page 217: ...rd admin Accounts Register Name account X user_name 1 String within 99 characters Blank Description Configures the register user name for a specific account Note The register user name is provided by ITSP It is used to identify the account Web User Interface Account Register User Name Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Accounts User Name account X password 1 String within 99...

Page 218: ...igures the port of the SIP server Y that specifies registrations for a specific account Example account 1 sip_server 1 port 5060 Note If the value of this parameter is set to 0 the port used depends on the value specified by the parameter account X sip_server Y transport_type Web User Interface Account Register SIP Server Y Port Phone User Interface None account X outbound_proxy_enable 1 0 or 1 0 ...

Page 219: ...nfigures the port of the outbound proxy server Y for a specific account Example account 1 outbound_proxy 1 port 5060 Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X outbound_proxy_enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Register Outbound Proxy Server Y Port Phone User Interface None account X reg_fail_retry_interval 1 Integer from 0 to 1800 30 Description Configures the in...

Page 220: ...ce 1 Click Account Register 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Line Active 4 Enter the desired value in Label Display Name Register Name User Name Password and SIP Server1 2 field respectively 5 If you use outbound proxy servers do the following 1 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server 2 Enter ...

Page 221: ...tact your system administrator for more information 5 If you use outbound proxy servers do the following 1 Select Enabled from the Outbound Status field 2 Enter the desired IP address or domain name in the Outbound Proxy1 2 field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Multiple Line Keys per Account You can customize the number of DSS keys to be automatically assigned with Line type It mean...

Page 222: ...IP T27P G 21 228 SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S 15 SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G 3 SIP T21 P E2 2 The following shows two line keys associated with a registered account 101 When you customize multiple line keys to be associated with an account you can configure the IP phone whether to transfer a call or set up a conference call using a new line key Procedure Multiple line keys per account can be configured usi...

Page 223: ...count X auto_label rule Configure whether to transfer a call using a new line key on a per line basis Parameter account X phone_setting call_appearance transfer_via_new_linekey Configure whether to set up a conference call using a new line key on a per line basis Parameter account X phone_setting call_appearance conference_via_new_linekey Web User Interface Configure auto linekeys Navigate to http...

Page 224: ...onfigures the number of DSS keys to be assigned with Line type automatically from the first unused one unused one means the DSS key is configured as N A or Line If a DSS key is used the IP phone will skip to the next unused DSS key The order of DSS key assigned automatically is Line Key Ext Key Example account 1 number_of_linekey 1 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features auto_lin...

Page 225: ...by For example Yea Yea Yea Tom_ 2 means to display Yea for first three line keys and from the fourth one display label Tom_2 Tom_3 and so on in turn Other Characters for example ABC will display ABC same as what you have configured Note It works only if the values of the parameters features auto_linekeys enable and account X auto_label enable are set to 1 Enabled It is not applicable to SIP T19 P ...

Page 226: ...s not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None phone_setting call_appearance conference_via_new_linekey 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to set up a conference call using a new line key when multiple line keys are associated with an account 0 Disabled the IP phone will place a new call using the current line key when pressing the C...

Page 227: ...all_appearance confer ence_via_new_linekey phone_setting call_appearance transfer_via_new_ linekey To configure auto linekeys feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Auto Linekeys If Auto LineKeys is enabled you can automatically assign multiple DSS keys with Line type for a registered line on the phone 3 Click Confirm to a...

Page 228: ...t calls per line key for account 1 to three you can only have three call appearances on line 1 The additional incoming calls will be rejected If you assign a registered line to multiple line keys refer to Multiple Line Keys per Account the number of concurrent calls applies to all line keys That is you can have three call appearances per line key Procedure Multiple call appearances can be configur...

Page 229: ...unt X phone_setting call_appearance calls_per_linekey is the per line parameter of the global parameter phone_setting call_appearance calls_per_linekey and it takes precedence over the global parameter X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 Call Display...

Page 230: ...Number Number Full Contact Info display name sip xxx domain com or Null The caller information may be too long to be entirely displayed on the phone in a short time You can customize the horizontal scroll speed of the caller information when the phone is ringing so that you can check the caller information more quickly before picking up the call Note Procedure Call Display can be configured using ...

Page 231: ...he call information display method Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p set tings calldisplay q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting contact_photo_display enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display contact avatar when it receives an incoming call dials an outgoing call or engages in a call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ...

Page 232: ...etting call_info_display_method 0 1 2 3 4 or 5 0 Description Specifies the call information display method when the IP phone receives an incoming call dials an outgoing call or is during an active call 0 Name Number 1 Number Name 2 Name 3 Number 4 Full Contact Info display name sip xxx domain com 5 Null Web User Interface Settings Call Display Call Information Display Method Phone User Interface N...

Page 233: ...ull down list of Display Contact Photo 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Display Called Party Information 4 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Call Information Display Method 5 Click Confirm to accept the change Display Method on Dialing When the IP phone is on the pre dialing or dialing screen the account information will be displayed on the LCD screen SIP T46...

Page 234: ... on dialing Parameter features caller_name_type_on_dialing Web User Interface Configure display method on dialing Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p fe atures general q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features caller_name_type_on_dialing 1 2 or 3 3 Description Configures the selected line information displayed on the pre dialing or dialing screen 1...

Page 235: ... 24 Hour There are 7 available date formats by default For example for the date format WWW DD MMM WWW represents the abbreviation of the weekday DD represents the two digit day and MMM represents the first three letters of the month The date formats available Date Format Example 2016 09 02 WWW MMM DD Fri Sep 02 DD MMM YY 02 Sep 16 YYYY MM DD 2016 09 02 DD MM YYYY 02 09 2016 MM DD YY 09 02 16 DD MM...

Page 236: ...ver A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network The Network Time Protocol NTP is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes time in the network The IP phones synchronize the time and date automatically from the NTP time server by default The NTP time server address can be offe...

Page 237: ...by DHCP priority feature and DHCP time feature Configure the NTP server time zone Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings datetime q load Phone User Interface Configure DHCP time feature Configure the NTP server time zone Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time manual_ntp_srv_prior 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the priority for the IP phone t...

Page 238: ...omain name of the NTP server 1 The IP phone will obtain the current time and date from the NTP server 1 Example local_time ntp_server1 192 168 0 5 Web User Interface Settings Time Date Primary Server Phone User Interface Menu Basic Time Date General SNTP Settings NTP Server1 local_time ntp_server2 IP address or domain name pool ntp org Description Configures the IP address or the domain name of th...

Page 239: ...rface Settings Time Date Time Zone Phone User Interface Menu Basic Time Date General SNTP Settings Time Zone local_time time_zone_name String within 32 characters China Beijing Description Configures the time zone name The available time zone names depend on the time zone configured by the parameter local_time time_zone For more information on the available time zone names for each time zone refer...

Page 240: ...ist of NTP by DHCP Priority 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the NTP server time zone via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Time Date 2 Select Disabled from the pull down list of Manual Time 3 Select the desired time zone from the pull down list of Time Zone 4 Select the desired location from the pull down list of Location This field appears only if Daylight Saving Time is se...

Page 241: ... from the Time Zone field 3 Enter the domain name or IP address in the NTP Server1 and NTP Server2 field respectively 4 Select Automatic from the Daylight Saving field 5 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Location field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Time and Date Settings You can set the time and date manually when IP phones cannot obtain the time...

Page 242: ...sents the long format of the month For example January February December D is used more than once for example DD It represents a two digit day For example 01 02 31 W WW It represents the abbreviation of the day of week For example Mon Tue Sun W is used more than twice for example WWW WWWW It represents the long format of the day of week For example Monday Tuesday Sunday Procedure Time and date can...

Page 243: ...P phone to obtain time and date from manual settings 0 Disabled obtain time and date from NTP server 1 Enabled obtain time and date from manual settings Web User Interface Settings Time Date Manual Time Phone User Interface None local_time time_format 0 or 1 1 Description Configures the time format 0 Hour 12 the time will be displayed in 12 hour format with AM or PM specified 1 Hour 24 the time wi...

Page 244: ... Format Date Format lcl datetime date format String Blank Description Configures the display format of date Y year M month D day W day of week Value formats are Any combination of W M D and the separator for example space dash slash Example lcl datetime date format W MD The IP phone displays the date in W MD format for example Wed 0420 Any combination of Y M D W and the separator for example space...

Page 245: ...User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure the time and date manually via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Time Date 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Manual Time 3 Enter the time and date in the corresponding fields 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the time and date formats via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Time Date 2 Select the desired v...

Page 246: ...tch soft key to select the desired time format from the Time Format field 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired date format from the Date Format field 4 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Daylight Saving Time DST Daylight Saving Time DST is the practice of temporary advancing clocks during the summer time so that evenings have more daylight and mornings have less Typica...

Page 247: ...s datetime q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time summer_time 0 1 or 2 2 Description Configures Daylight Saving Time DST feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Automatic Web User Interface Settings Time Date Daylight Saving Time Phone User Interface Menu Basic Time Date General SNTP Settings Daylight Saving local_time dst_time_type 0 or 1 0 Description Co...

Page 248: ...February 12 December Day 1 the first day in a month 31 the last day in a month Hour 0 0am 1 1am 23 11pm Example local_time start_time 1 1 2 If local_time dst_time_type is set to 1 DST by Week use the mapping Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Week of Month 1 the first week in a month 5 the last week in a month Day of Week 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 7 Sunday Hour of Day 0 0am 1 1am 23 11pm Example loca...

Page 249: ...in a month 5 the last week in a month Day of Week 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 7 Sunday Hour of Day 0 0am 1 1am 23 11pm Example local_time start_time 4 3 2 3 Note It works only if the value of the parameter local_time summer_time is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Time Date End Date Phone User Interface None local_time offset_time Integer from 300 to 300 Blank Description Configures the offset ...

Page 250: ...box in the Fixed Type field Enter the starting time in the Start Date field Enter the ending time in the End Date field Mark the DST by Week radio box in the Fixed Type field Select the desired values of DST Start Month DST Start Week of Month DST Start Day of Week Start Hour of Day DST Stop Month DST Stop Week of Month DST Stop Day of Week and End Hour of Day from the pull down lists 7 Enter the ...

Page 251: ...alues Description DSTData required no File root element DST required no Time Zone item s root element szTime required X Y X 0 14 Y 0 59 Time Zone szZone required String if the content is more than one city it is the best to keep their daylight saving time the same Time Zone name iType optional 0 1 0 DST by Date 1 DST by Week DST time type This item is needed if you want to configure DST szStart op...

Page 252: ...ear to the ending time of the next year Customizing an AutoDST file 1 Open the AutoDST file using an ASCII editor 2 Add or modify time zone and DST settings as you want in the AutoDST file Example 1 To modify the DST settings for the existing time zone 5 Pakistan Islamabad and add DST settings for the existing time zone 5 30 India Calcutta Example 2 Add a new time zone 6 Paradise with daylight sav...

Page 253: ...rver 192 168 1 100 and downloads the AutoDST file AutoDST xml After update you will find a new time zone Paradise and updated DST of Pakistan Islamabad and India Calcutta via web user interface Settings Time Date Time Zone Note It works only if the value of the parameter local_time summer_time is set to 2 Automatic Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Language IP phones support multip...

Page 254: ...he IP phone Language packs can only be loaded using configuration file You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for language packs You can also obtain the language packs online http support yealink com documentFront forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage For more information on obtaining the language packs refer to Obtaining Boot Files Configuration Files Resource Files on page 105 Note To modify tra...

Page 255: ...010 GUI Spanish lang Spanish Latin 011 GUI Spanish_LA lang Turkish 012 GUI Turkish lang Russian 013 GUI Russian lang When adding a new language pack for the phone user interface the language pack must be formatted as X GUI name lang X starts from 014 name is replaced with the language name If the language name is the same as the existing one the existing language pack will be overridden by the new...

Page 256: ...on file If you want to add a new custom language for example Guilan to your IP phone for example SIP T46G prepare the language file named as 011 GUI Guilan lang for downloading After update you will find a new language selection Guilan on the IP phone user interface Menu Basic Language Procedure Loading language pack can be performed using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration ...

Page 257: ...anguage template file If you want to download multiple language packs to the phone simultaneously you can configure as following gui_lang url http 192 168 10 25 000 GUI English lang gui_lang url http 192 168 10 25 001 GUI Chinese_S lang Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None gui_lang delete http localhost all or http localhost Y GUI nam e lang Blank Description Deletes the specified or ...

Page 258: ...guese 8 Portuguese js 8 Portuguese_note xml Spanish 9 Spanish js 9 Spanish_note xml Turkish 10 Turkish js 10 Turkish_note xml Russian 11 Russian js 11 Russian_note xml When adding a new language pack for the web user interface the language pack must be formatted as Y name js Y starts from 12 name is replaced with the language name If the language name is the same as the existing one the existing l...

Page 259: ... translation of the note language pack The note information is displayed in the icon of the web user interface The note language pack must be formatted as Y name_note xml Y and name are associated with web language pack To customize a note language file 1 Open the desired note language template file for example 1 English_note xml using an ASCII editor 2 Modify the text of the note field Don t modi...

Page 260: ...stom language pack for web user interface Parameter wui_lang url Specify the access URL of the custom note language pack for web user interface Parameter wui_lang_note url Delete custom language packs and note language packs of the web user interface Parameter wui_lang delete Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default wui_lang url URL within 511 characters Blank De...

Page 261: ...ave modified the language template file If you want to download multiple language packs to the phone simultaneously you can configure as following wui_lang url http 192 168 10 25 1 English_note xml wui_lang url http 192 168 10 25 11 Russian_note xml Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None wui_lang delete http localhost all or http localhost Y name js Blank Description Delete the specifie...

Page 262: ...methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Specify the languages for the phone user interface or the web user interface Parameters static lang gui static lang wui Web User Interface Specify the language for the web user interface Phone User Interface Specify the language for the phone user interface Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default stat...

Page 263: ...wui Refer to the following content English Description Configures the language used on the web user interface Permitted Values English Chinese_S Chinese_T French German Italian Polish Portuguese Spanish Turkish Russian or the custom language name Example static lang wui English If you want to use the custom language for example Wuilan for the IP phone configure the parameter static lang wui Wuilan...

Page 264: ...es in the Hebrew_ime txt file becomes affective when the language is set to Hebrew The changes in the ime txt file is affective for all the languages IP phones support 6 input methods 2aB abc Abc 123 ABC and Hebrew By default Hebrew input method is hidden the IP phone will automatically display the Hebrew input method when the language is set to Hebrew If you want to set the language to Hebrew you...

Page 265: ...Configuring Basic Features 243 The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file ime txt The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file Hebrew_ime txt ...

Page 266: ...ian_ime txt To customize a keypad input method file 1 Open the desired keypad input method file for example ime txt using an ASCII editor 2 Under the input method field for example abc add new characters or adjust the characters order within the double quotation marks on the right of the equal sign Don t modify the item on the left of the equal sign ...

Page 267: ...gures the access URL of the custom keypad input method file Example gui_input_method url http 192 168 10 25 ime txt During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 1 25 and downloads the custom keypad input method file ime txt gui_input_method url http 192 168 10 25 Russian_ime txt During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provi...

Page 268: ...hod file for example ime txt for the phone gui_input_method delete http localhost ime txt Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Specifying the Default Input Method In addition to customizing the keypad input method file you can also specify the default input method for the IP phone when editing or searching for contacts Procedure Specify the default input methods using the configuratio...

Page 269: ...escription Configures the default input method when the user searches for contacts in the Local Directory LDAP Remote Phone Book or Blacklist Example directory search_default_input_method abc Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Logo Customization Logo customization allows unifying the IP phone appearance or displaying a custom image on the LCD screen such as a company logo instead of...

Page 270: ... Logo File Format Resolution SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S dob 192 64 2 gray scale SIP T27P G dob 240 120 2 gray scale SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 dob 132 64 2 gray scale Note Customizing a Logo Template File The common picture format can be bmp Yealink IP phones only support the dob format logo files Yealink provides PictureExDemo tool to convert bmp format to dob format You can ask the d...

Page 271: ...tep to add multiple original picture files 3 Click the Convert button Then you can find the DOB logo files in the adv directory Configuring the Logo Shown on the Idle Screen Procedure The logo shown on the idle screen can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the logo shown on the LCD screen Parameter phone_setting lcd_logo mo...

Page 272: ...escription Configures the logo shown on the LCD screen 0 Off the IP phone is not allowed to display a logo 1 System Logo the LCD screen will display the system logo 2 Custom Logo the LCD screen will display the custom logo you need to upload a custom logo file to the IP phone Note It is not applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface Features General Informati...

Page 273: ...nes Web User Interface Features General Information Upload Logo Phone User Interface None lcd_logo delete http localhost all Blank Description Deletes all custom logo files Example lcd_logo delete http localhost all Note It is not applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure an image logo via web user interface 1 Clic...

Page 274: ...addition to specifying which soft keys to display you can determine their display order It can be configured based on call states The following shows the softkeys displaying on the phone in the Dialing state You can configure the softkey layout using the softkey layout templates for different call states For more information on how to configure a softkey layout template refer to Customizing Softke...

Page 275: ...taining the softkey layout template refer to Obtaining Boot Files Configuration Files Resource Files on page 105 The following table lists soft keys available for IP phones in different call states Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys CallFailed Call Failed NewCall Empty Empty Empty Empty Switch End Call CallIn Incoming Call Answer Forward Silence Reject Empty Switch Decline Connecti ng...

Page 276: ...k Transfer Empty Empty End Call Empty Switch Talking Talk On Talk Transfer Hold Conference End Call Empty Mute SWAP NewCall Switch Answer Reject PriHold Park GPark RTP Status Hold Transfer Resume NewCall End Call Empty Switch Answer Reject Held Transfer Empty Conference End Call Empty Switch Answer Reject NewCall Hold PreTrans Transfer to not applicable to SIP T48G S IP phones B Transfer Send Dele...

Page 277: ... list and Disable indicates the end of the soft key list The disabled soft keys are not displayed on the LCD screen Create disabled soft keys between Disable and Disable Enable indicates the start of the enabled soft key list and Enable indicates the end of the soft key list The enabled soft keys are displayed on the LCD screen Create enabled soft keys between Enable and Enable Default indicates t...

Page 278: ...ing from the disabled soft key list to enabled soft key list in the file For each soft key that you want to disabled just move the string from the enabled soft key list to disabled soft key list 3 Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server 4 Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template in the configuration file ...

Page 279: ...stom_softkey_connecting url custom_softkey_dialing url custom_softkey_ring_back url custom_softkey_talking url Web User Interface Configure the softkey layout Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings softkey q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting custom_softkey_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables custom soft keys layout fe...

Page 280: ...ess URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the CallIn state Example custom_softkey_call_in url http 192 168 1 20 XMLfiles CallIn xml During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 1 20 and downloads the CallIn xml file from the XMLfiles directory Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting custom...

Page 281: ...le from the XMLfiles directory Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting custom_softkey_enable is set to 1 Enabled It is not applicable to SIP T48G S IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None custom_softkey_ring_back url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when i...

Page 282: ...t to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure softkey layout via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Softkey Layout 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Custom Softkey 3 Select the desired state from the pull down list of Call States 4 Select the desired soft key from the Unselected Softkeys column and then click The selected soft key appears in ...

Page 283: ...key Procedure Key as send can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure a send key Parameter features key_as_send Configure send pound key Parameter features send_pound_key Web User Interface Configure a send key Configure send pound key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Phone User Interface Configu...

Page 284: ...Interface Menu Features Others General Key As Send features send_pound_key 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to dial out when the user only presses the key on dialing screen or pre dialing screen 0 Disabled the IP phone will dial out when the user presses the key for the second time 1 Enabled the IP phone will dial out when the user presses the key for the third time Note It wo...

Page 285: ...he change Send Tone Send tone allows the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses the send key It works only if key tone is enabled For more information on key tone refer to Key Tone on page 264 Procedure Send tone can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure a send tone Parameter features send_key_tone Web User Interface ...

Page 286: ...configure a send tone via web user interface 1 Click on Features Audio 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Key Tone 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Send Tone 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Key Tone Key tone allows the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses any key Procedure Key tone can be configured using the following methods Central Provisi...

Page 287: ... via web user interface 1 Click on Features Audio 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Key Tone 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Send Tone 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a key tone via web user interface 1 Press Menu Basic Sound Key Tone 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Key Tone field 3 Press the Save so...

Page 288: ...l Plan using XML Template Files Yealink IP phones support the following dial plan features Replace Rule Dial Now Area Code Block Out You can configure these dial plan features via web user interface or using configuration file You can select to add a replace rule dial now rule one by one or using the replace rule dial now template file to add multiple replace rules at a time You need to know the f...

Page 289: ...ered by the user IP phones support up to 100 replace rules which can be created either one by one or in batch using a replace rule template For more information on how to customize a replace rule template refer to Customizing Replace Rule Template File on page 269 Procedure Replace rule can be created using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Create the ...

Page 290: ...enter the number 1 and press the send key the number 254245 will replace the entered number 1 Note It works only if the values of the parameters dialplan digitmap enable and account X dialplan digitmap enable are set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface Settings Dial Plan Replace Rule Replace Phone User Interface None dialplan replace line_id X X ranges from 1 to 100 Refer to the following content Bla...

Page 291: ...fix field 3 Enter the string in the Replace field 4 Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank If you leave this field blank or enter 0 the replace rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone 5 Click Add to add the replace rule Customizing Replace Rule Template File The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules You can ask the distributor or ...

Page 292: ...and for line1 line12 SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G 0 6 0 stands for all lines 1 6 stand for line1 line6 SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G 0 3 0 stands for all lines 1 3 stand for line1 line3 SIP T21 P E2 0 2 0 stands for all lines 1 2 stand for line1 line2 At most 100 replace rules can be added to the IP phone The expression syntax in the replace rule template is the same as that introduced in the section Dial Pl...

Page 293: ...lplan xml During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 10 25 and downloads the replace rule file dialplan xml Note It works only if the values of the parameters dialplan digitmap enable and account X dialplan digitmap enable are set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Dial Now Dial now is a string used to match numbers en...

Page 294: ...onfigure the delay time for the dial now rule Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan dialnow rule X X ranges from 1 to 100 String within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the dial now rule the string used to match the numbers entered by the user When entered numbers match the prede...

Page 295: ... not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the values of the parameters dialplan digitmap enable and account X dialplan digitmap enable are set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface Settings Dial Plan Dial Now Account Phone User Interface None phone_setting dialnow_delay Integer from 0 to 14 1 Description Configures the delay time in seconds for the dial now rule When entered numbers ma...

Page 296: ...e field 3 Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank If you leave this field blank or enter 0 the dial now rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone 4 Click Add to add the dial now rule To configure the time out for dial now rule via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Enter the desired time within 0 14 in seconds in the Time Out for Dial Now Ru...

Page 297: ...alid values are 0 and line ID Multiple line IDs are separated by commas It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones The following table lists valid values of line ID for each phone model Phone Model Values Description SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G 0 16 0 stands for all lines 1 16 stand for line1 line16 SIP T52S T42G T42S 0 12 0 stands for all lines 1 12 stand for line1 line12 SIP T41P T41S ...

Page 298: ...ng Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the access URL of the dial now template Parameter dialplan_dialnow url Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default dialplan_dialnow url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the dial now rule template file Example dialplan_dialnow url http 192 168 10 25 dialnow xml During the auto provisi...

Page 299: ...ialplan area_code line_id Web User Interface Create the area code rule and specify the maximum and minimum lengths of entered numbers Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings areacode q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan area_code code String within 16 characters Blank Description Configures the area code to be added before the entered n...

Page 300: ...maximum length of the entered numbers Note The value must be larger than the minimum length It works only if the values of the parameters dialplan digitmap enable and account X dialplan digitmap enable are set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface Settings Dial Plan Area Code Max Length 1 15 Phone User Interface None dialplan area_code line_id Refer to the following content Blank for all lines Descript...

Page 301: ...er the desired values in the Code Min Length 1 15 and Max Length 1 15 fields 3 Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank If you leave this field blank or enter 0 the area code rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Block Out Block out rule prevents users from dialing out specific numbers When entered numbers match the predefined ...

Page 302: ...only if the values of the parameters dialplan digitmap enable and account X dialplan digitmap enable are set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface Settings Dial Plan Block Out BlockOut NumberX Phone User Interface None dialplan block_out line_id X X ranges from 1 to 10 Refer to the following content Blank for all lines Description Configures the desired line to apply the block out rule The digit 0 stan...

Page 303: ...ply to all accounts on the IP phone 4 Click Confirm to add the block out rule Dial Plan using Digit Map String Rules Digit maps described in RFC 3435 are defined by a single string or a list of strings If a number entered matches any string of a digit map the call is automatically placed If a number entered matches no string an impossible match you can specify the phone s behavior You can specify ...

Page 304: ...arbitrary character Note If the string ends with a dot for example 123 a match will occur immediately after inputting the characters before the dot e 123 since the dot allows for zero occurrences of the preceding construct So we recommend you to add a letter T after the dot for example 123 T for inputting more characters R The letter R indicates that certain matched strings are replaced Using a RR...

Page 305: ...p on a per line basis Procedure Digit map can be created using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration Files y0000000000xx c fg Configure digit map on a phone basis Parameters dialplan digitmap enable dialplan digitmap string dialplan digitmap interdigit_long_timer dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer dialplan digitmap no_match_action dialplan digitmap active on_hook_dialing ...

Page 306: ...rward account X dialplan digitmap apply_to press_se nd Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan digitmap enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the digit map feature for the IP phone 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The value configured by the parameter account X dialplan digitmap enable takes precedence over that configured by this parameter Web User Inte...

Page 307: ...f only a partial match exists The value of this parameter should be greater than that configured by the parameter dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer For example dialplan digitmap string 1xxT xxxxx T1 dialplan digitmap interdigit_long_timer 10 dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer 5 When you enter 1 it matches part of two digit maps the IP phone tries to wait 10 seconds and then dials out ...

Page 308: ...n configuration configure a string of positive integers separated by for each string of the digit map in the corresponding position If there are more digit maps than timeout values the last timeout is applied to the extra digit map If there are more timeout values than digit maps the extra timeout values are ignored Example dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer 4 5 3 6 2 1 If the value of the p...

Page 309: ...abled The value configured by the parameter account X dialplan digitmap no_match_action takes precedence over that configured by this parameter Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dialplan digitmap active on_hook_dialing 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the entered numbers to match the predefined string of the digit map in real time It is only applicable to the on hook dialin...

Page 310: ...the digit map to be applied to the numbers dialed from the directory 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter dialplan digitmap enable or account X dialplan digitmap enable is set to 1 Enabled The value configured by the parameter account X dialplan digitmap apply_to directory_dial takes precedence over that configured by this parameter Web User Interface None Phone Us...

Page 311: ...rameter account X dialplan digitmap apply_to forward takes precedence over that configured by this parameter Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dialplan digitmap apply_to press_send 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the entered number to match the predefined string of the digit map after pressing a send key It is only applicable to the off hook dialing The off hook dialing in...

Page 312: ...plan digitmap enable account X dialplan digitmap string dialplan digitmap string account X dialplan digitmap interdigit_long_timer dialplan digitmap interdigit_long_timer account X dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer dialplan digitmap interdigit_short_timer account X dialplan digitmap no_match_action dialplan digitmap no_match_action account X dialplan digitmap active on_hook_dialing dialplan...

Page 313: ...plan Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED LLDP MED allows the phone to use the location information Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN sent by the switch as a caller ID for making emergency calls The outbound identity used in the P Asserted Identity PAI header of the SIP INVITE request is ta...

Page 314: ...ncy outbound identities when placing an emergency call If it is set to ELIN the outbound identity used in the P Asserted Identity PAI header of the SIP INVITE request is taken from the network using an LLDP MED Emergency Location Identifier Number ELIN The custom outbound identity configured by dialplan emergency custom_asserted_id will be used if the phone fails to get the LLDP MED ELIN value If ...

Page 315: ...ed in the P Asserted Identity PAI header for example sip 1234567890 abc com Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dialplan emergency server X address X ranges from 1 to 3 IP address or domain name Blank Description Configures the IP address or domain name of the emergency server X to be used for routing calls Note If the account is registered successfully or failed the account informat...

Page 316: ...e so a caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required Default When X 1 the default value is 911 When X 2 255 the default value is Blank Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dialplan emergency X server_priority X ranges from 1 to 255 a combination of digits 1 2 and 3 1 2 3 Description Configures the priority for the emergency servers to be used The digits are sep...

Page 317: ...onfigured the emergency calls will be dialed using the following priority SIP server emergency server if the account is not registered the emergency server will be used Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Hotline Hotline sometimes referred to as hot dialing is a point to point communication link in which a call is automatically directed to the preset hotline number The IP phone autom...

Page 318: ...ift the handset press the Speakerphone or the line key Leaving it blank disables hotline feature Example features hotline_number 1234 Note Line key is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features General Information Hotline Number Phone User Interface Menu Features Others Hot Line Hotline Number features hotline_delay Integer from 0 to 10 4 Description Configures the waitin...

Page 319: ...Line 2 Enter the hotline number in the Hotline Number field 3 Enter the waiting time in seconds in the Hotline Delay field 4 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Off Hook Hot Line Dialing For security reasons IP phones support off hook hot line dialing feature which allows the phone to first dial out the pre configured number when the user lifts the handset presses the Speakerphone key or ...

Page 320: ...peakerphone or desired line key or dials out a call using account X 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the phone will first dial out the pre configured number configured by the parameter account X auto_dial_num when a user lifts the handset presses the Speakerphone or desired line key dials out a call using account X Note Line key is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User In...

Page 321: ...irectory History Remote Phone Book and LDAP The desired lists can be added to directory lists using a directory file favorite_setting xml Note Customizing a Directory Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for directory template You can also obtain the directory template online http support yealink com documentFront forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage For more information on obtain...

Page 322: ...P phones in neutral firmware which are designed for the BroadWorks environment priority 1 to 12 1 is the highest priority 12 is the lowest The display priority of the directory list enable 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Directory list whether to display on the IP phone LCD screen dev common T19 T21 T23 T40 T27 T27G T29 T41 T42 T42S T41S T46 T46S T48 T48S T52 T54S The applicable phone models of the direc...

Page 323: ... Specify the access URL of the directory template file Parameter static directory_setting url Web User Interface Configure the directory Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p contacts favorite q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default static directory_setting url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the directory templa...

Page 324: ...to the Enabled column 4 To remove a list from the Enabled column select the desired list and then click 5 To adjust the display order of list select the desired list and then click or 6 Click Confirm to accept the change The IP phone LCD screen will display the enabled list s in the adjusted order Search Source List In Dialing Search source list in dialing allows the IP phone to automatically sear...

Page 325: ...cal_directory_search calllog_search remote_directory_search ldap_search BroadSoft_directory_search BroadSoft_UC_search plcm_directory_search genband_directory_search MetaSwitch_directory_search MetaSwitch_calllog_search The directory list For example local_directory_search for the local directory list Note Do not edit this field display_name Local Contacts History Remote Phonebook LDAP Network Dir...

Page 326: ...le configure the local directory list edit the values within double quotes in the following strings item id_name local_directory_search display_name Local Contacts priority 1 enable 1 3 Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server for example 192 168 1 20 4 Specify the access URL of the custom super search template file in the configuration files for example super_search url http...

Page 327: ...arch template file super_search xml Web User Interface Directory Setting Search Source List In Dialing Phone User Interface None To configure search source list in dialing via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Setting 2 In the Search Source List In Dialing block select the desired list from the Disabled column and then click The selected list appears in the Enabled column 3 Repeat the step 2...

Page 328: ...lists to the contact directory IP phones maintain a local call log Call log consists of four lists Missed Calls Placed Calls Received Calls and Forwarded Calls Each call log list supports up to 100 entries To store call information you must enable save call log feature in advance You can access the call history information via web user interface Directory Phone Call Info Note Procedure Call log ca...

Page 329: ... Enables or disables the IP phone to save the call log 0 Disabled the IP phone cannot log the missed calls placed calls received calls and forwarded calls in the call log lists 1 Enabled Note To log the missed calls the value of the parameter account X missed_calllog should be set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Save Call Log Phone User Interface Menu Features Others G...

Page 330: ...named MAC calllog xml You can back up this file to the server avoiding data loss Once the call logs update the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server If a call log file exists on the server the file will be overridden The IP phone will request to download the MAC calllog xml file according to its MAC address from the server during auto provisio...

Page 331: ...log xml file to the server each time the call logs update and download the MAC calllog xml file from the server during auto provisioning 0 Disabled the IP phone does not upload download the call log file MAC calllog xml to the server 1 Enabled the IP phone uploads the call log file MAC calllog xml to the specific path configured by the parameter static auto_provision local_calllog backup path each...

Page 332: ...up enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static auto_provision local_calllog write_delay terminated Integer from 10 to 600 60 Description Configures the delay time in seconds for the IP phone to upload the MAC calllog xml file each time the call logs update Note It works only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision local_calllog backup enable is s...

Page 333: ...er features call_log_show_num Web User Interface Configure call list show number Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features call_log_show_num 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to show the other party s phone number instead of the name in the call log lists 0 Disabled the IP...

Page 334: ...nge Missed Call Log Missed call log allows the IP phone to display the prompt message and an indicator icon on the idle screen and to log missed calls in the Missed Calls list when the IP phone misses calls It is configurable on a per line basis Once the user accesses the Missed Calls list the prompt message and indicator icon on the idle screen disappear You can configure whether to display a pro...

Page 335: ...sses calls 1 Enabled the IP phone displays a prompt message and an indicator icon on the idle screen and logs the missed call in the Missed Calls list when it misses calls Note It works only if the value of the parameter features save_call_history is set to 1 Enabled The prompt message displays only if the value of the parameter features missed_call_popup enable is set to 1 Enabled For SIP T29G T4...

Page 336: ... using a local contact file Yealink IP phones support both xml and csv format contact files but you can only customize the xml format contact file Contacts can be configured to have a backup on the provisioning server or a specific server The contact file format is xml For SIP T29G T46G T46S T48G T48S T52S T54S IP phones you can customize the contact avatar You can also customize a contact icon fo...

Page 337: ...iguration Files Resource Files on page 105 The following table lists meaning of each variable in the local contact template file Element Values Description root_group no Group list s root element group no Group s root element display_name All Contacts Blacklist An element of group Group name ring Format of the value System ring tone Auto Silent wav Splash wav RingN wav integer N ranges from 1 to 8...

Page 338: ... the built in avatar Config avatar name the custom avatar Contact avatar Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones The following table lists valid values of line for each phone model Phone Model Values Description SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G 1 15 1 stands for Auto the first registered line 0 15 stand for line1 line16 SIP T52S T42G T42S 1 11 1 stands for A...

Page 339: ...ing server will not take effect Web User Interface Directory Local Directory Import Local Directory File Phone User Interface None local_contact photo url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of a contact avatar file The format of the contact avatar must be png jpg bmp or jpeg The contact avatar file should be uploaded to the provisioning server in advance Example ...

Page 340: ...ce and then place it to the provisioning server Example local_contact image url tftp 192 168 10 25 photo tar Note It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None local_contact data_photo_tar url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the compressed TAR file consisting of the avatars TAR fi...

Page 341: ...bmp or jpeg The contact icon file should be compressed as a TAR file in advance and then place it to the provisioning server Example local_contact icon url tftp 192 168 10 25 photo2 tar Note It is only applicable to SIP T48G S IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To add a group to the local directory via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Local Directory 2 In the Group ...

Page 342: ...ontact to the local directory via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Local Directory 2 In the Contacts block enter the name and the office mobile or other numbers in the corresponding fields 3 Select the desired ring tone from the pull down list of Ring Tone 4 Select the desired group from the pull down list of Group 5 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account ...

Page 343: ... to the local directory via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Directory Local Directory 2 Press the AddGroup soft key 3 Enter the desired group name in the Name field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired group ring tone from the Ring field 5 Press the Add soft key to accept the change To import an XML contact list file via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Local Directory ...

Page 344: ... user interface 1 Click on Directory Local Directory 2 Click Browse to locate a contact list file the file format must be csv from your local system 3 Optional Check the Show Title checkbox It will prevent importing the title of the contact information which is located in the first line of the CSV file 4 Click Import CSV to import the contact list 5 Optional Mark the On radio box in the Delete Old...

Page 345: ...ft key 4 Enter the name and the office mobile or other numbers in the corresponding fields 5 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the Account field If Auto is selected the IP phone will use the default account when placing calls to the contact from the local directory 6 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired ring tone from the Ring field 7 Press the Sav...

Page 346: ...ration file For example local_contact data url tftp 192 168 10 25 contact xml During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 10 25 and downloads the local contact file contact xml Note Customizing a Local Contact File Color Screen Phones The following shows the procedure of customizing a local contact file for SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP...

Page 347: ... server 6 Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template in the configuration file For example local_contact data url tftp 192 168 10 25 contact xml During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 10 25 and downloads the local contact file contact xml Note Scenario B Using the Custom Avatar for Contact This scenario is applicable to SIP T5...

Page 348: ...online http gnuwin32 sourceforge net packages gtar htm This section provides you on how to package the tar file using 7 Zip To package a tar formatted file using the tool 7 Zip on the Windows platform 1 Download and install 7 Zip on the local system 2 Create a folder for example photo on the local system for example C Program Files and place the file that will be compressed for example cutom1 jpg ...

Page 349: ...plate file using an ASCII editor 2 For each group that you want to add add the following string to the file Each starts on a separate line group display_name ring 3 For each contact that you want to add add the following string to the file Each starts on a separate line contact display_name office_number mobile_number other_number line ring group_id_name default_photo 4 Specify the values within d...

Page 350: ...P phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 10 25 and downloads the local contact file contact xml and avatar pictures cutom1 jpg and cutom2 png Method 2 local_contact data url tftp 192 168 10 25 contact xml local_contact image url tftp 192 168 10 25 photo tar For more information on generating a contact avatar file photo tar refer to Preparing the Tar Formatted File on page 326 During the...

Page 351: ... 1 Open the template file using an ASCII editor 2 For each group that you want to add add the following string to the file Each starts on a separate line group display_name ring 3 For each contact that you want to add add the following string to the file Each starts on a separate line The custom avatar and icon can be different but make sure the icon name is the same as avatar name Note that if yo...

Page 352: ...ning server 6 Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template file in the configuration file There are two methods to specify custom avatar and icon for contacts Method 1 local_contact photo url tftp 192 168 10 25 cutom1 jpg local_contact photo url tftp 192 168 10 25 cutom2 png local_contact data url tftp 192 168 10 25 contact xml local_contact icon_image url tftp 192 168 10 25 cutom1 ...

Page 353: ...tom icons downloaded from the provisioning server If you have configured to back up the local contacts to the server the IP phone will download the contact file MAC contact xml from the backup path from the server and display the downloaded contacts in the local directory list The contacts in the local contact file contact xml downloaded from the provisioning server don t take effect But the avata...

Page 354: ...up the local contact file can be configured using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the IP phone to back up the local contacts Parameters static auto_provision local_contact b ackup enable static auto_provision local_contact b ackup path static auto_provision custom upload_ method Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted ...

Page 355: ...atic auto_provision local_contact backup path http 192 168 1 20 contact Once the contacts update the IP phone will upload the contact file to the specified path http 192 168 1 20 contact During the auto provisioning process the IP phone downloads the contact file MAC contact xml from the specified path http 192 168 1 20 contact Note It works only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision...

Page 356: ...igure live dialpad Parameters phone_setting predial_autodial phone_setting inter_digit_time Web User Interface Configure live dialpad Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings preference q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting predial_autodial 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the live dialpad feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the IP ...

Page 357: ... Interface None To configure live dialpad via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Live Dialpad 3 Enter the desired delay time in the Inter Digit Time 1 14s field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Speed Dial Speed dial allows users to speed up dialing the contacts on the phone s idle screen using dedicated DSS keys Procedure Spe...

Page 358: ...ore information on how to configure the DSS Key refer to Appendix D Configuring DSS Key on page 879 Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values linekey X type 1 programablekey X type 2 expansion_module X key Y type 3 13 Description Configures a DSS key as a speed dial DSS key on the IP phone Example linekey 1 type 13 Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T4...

Page 359: ...S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Example linekey 1 line 1 Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Ext Key Line Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Account ID linekey X value 1 programablekey X value 2 expansion_module X key Y value 3 String within 99 characters Description Configures the extension you want to dial out Example linekey 1 value 1008 Note EXT key is only applic...

Page 360: ...DSS Keys Line Key X Short Label 1 X is the line key ID For SIP T48G S X 1 29 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X 1 27 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X 1 15 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X 1 21 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 2 X is the programable key ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP...

Page 361: ... receive a new incoming call when there is already an active call The new incoming call is presented to the user visually on the LCD screen Call waiting tone allows the IP phone to play a short tone to remind the user audibly of a new incoming call during conversation Call waiting tone works only if call waiting is enabled You can customize call waiting tone or select specialized tone sets vary fr...

Page 362: ...e 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables call waiting feature 0 Disabled a new incoming call is automatically rejected by the IP phone with a busy signal configured by the parameter features normal_refuse_code during a call 1 Enabled the LCD screen will present a new incoming call during a call In both cases users can put an active call on hold to make outgoing calls Note It works only if the va...

Page 363: ...on Configures the call waiting on code The IP phone will send the code to activate call waiting on server side when you activate it on the IP phone Example call_waiting on_code 71 Web User Interface Features General Information Call Waiting On Code Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Waiting On Code call_waiting off_code String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the call waiting...

Page 364: ...he pull down list of Call Waiting Tone 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure call waiting and call waiting tone via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features Call Waiting 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Call Waiting field 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Play Tone field 4 Optional Enter the call waiting on co...

Page 365: ...ble 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically redial the last dialed number when the callee is temporarily unavailable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Auto Redial Phone User Interface Menu Features Others Auto Redial Auto Redial auto_redial interval Integer from 1 to 300 10 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the IP p...

Page 366: ...Redial Times 1 300 Phone User Interface Menu Features Others Auto Redial Redial Times To configure auto redial via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Auto Redial 3 Enter the waiting time in the Auto Redial Interval 1 300s field 4 Enter the desired times in the Auto Redial Times 1 300 field 5 Click Confirm to accept the c...

Page 367: ...e IP phones to play a tone when an incoming call is automatically answered You can customize the auto answer tone or select specialized tone sets vary from country to country for your IP phone For more information refer to Tones on page 726 Procedure Auto answer can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure auto answer and auto answer mute...

Page 368: ... IP phone can automatically answer an incoming call Note The IP phone cannot automatically answer the incoming call during a call or while dialing even if auto answer is enabled Web User Interface Account Basic Auto Answer Phone User Interface Menu Features Auto Answer Line X Auto Answer features auto_answer first_call_only 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to only automaticall...

Page 369: ...only if the value of the parameter account X auto_answer is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Auto Answer Delay 1 4s Phone User Interface None features auto_answer_tone enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to play a warning tone when an incoming call is automatically answered 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note For the call coming from a SIP account it wor...

Page 370: ...call Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure auto answer via web user interface 1 Click on Account Basic 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account...

Page 371: ...user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Enable Auto Answer Tone 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure auto answer via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features Auto Answer 2 Select the desired line 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto Answer field ...

Page 372: ...ace Configure IP direct auto answer feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features ip_call auto_answer enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the auto answer feature for IP call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the IP phone can automatically answer an IP call Note It works only if the value of th...

Page 373: ...P call feature is disabled Procedure Allow IP call can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure allow IP call Parameter features direct_ip_call_enable Web User Interface Configure allow IP call Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p featu res general q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default ...

Page 374: ...desired value from the pull down list of Allow IP Call 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Accept SIP Trust Server Only Accept SIP trust server only enables the IP phones to only accept the SIP message from your SIP server and outbound proxy server It can prevent the phone receiving ghost calls from random numbers like 100 1000 and so on To stop this from happening you also need to disable allow ...

Page 375: ...lt sip trust_ctrl 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to only accept the SIP message from the SIP server and outbound proxy server 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Accept SIP Trust Server Only Phone User Interface None To configure accept SIP trust server only feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the d...

Page 376: ...RIBE sip 1000 10 10 20 34 5060 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 10 20 32 5060 branch z9hG4bK2880274891 From 10111 sip 10111 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 8643512 To sip 1000 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 4025601441 Call ID 4_2103527761 10 10 20 32 CSeq 2 SUBSCRIBE Contact sip 10111 10 10 20 32 5060 Accept application dialog info xml Max Forwards 70 User Agent Yealink SIP T46G 28 82 0 20 Expires 60 Event dialog Content Length...

Page 377: ...a NOTIFY message The busy party has finished the call and is available again A new notification update from the busy party is received by the caller NOTIFY sip 10111 10 10 20 32 5060 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 10 20 31 5060 branch z9hG4bK3431394016 From sip 1000 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 1558968605 To 10111 sip 10111 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 140677866 Call ID 0_2584152566 10 10 20 32 CSeq 5 NOTIFY Contact sip ...

Page 378: ...Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features call_completion_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables call completion feature If a user places a call and the callee is temporarily unavailable to answer the call call completion feature allows notifying the user when the callee becomes available to receive a call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the caller is notified when the call...

Page 379: ...allee s screen The callee s phone LCD screen prompts an incoming call from anonymity Anonymous call is configurable on a per line basis Example of anonymous SIP header when the anonymous call feature is performed on local Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 3 20 14 5060 branch z9hG4bK3074920774 From Anonymous sip anonymous anonymous invalid tag 131654239 To sip 1006 10 2 1 48 5060 Call ID 0_288363101 10 3 20 14 CS...

Page 380: ...llowing methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure anonymous call Parameters account X anonymous_call account X anonymous_call server_base_only account X anonymous_call_oncode account X anonymous_call_offcode Web User Interface Configure anonymous call Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p accou nt basic q load acc 0 Phone User Interface Configure anonymous call Details ...

Page 381: ...e From header of the INVITE message even if the anonymous call feature is enabled on the IP phone Note You need to configure parameters account X anonymous_call_oncode and account X anonymous_call_offcode to activate or deactivate the server side anonymous call feature Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X anonymous_call_oncode 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description ...

Page 382: ...ccount ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure anonymous call via web user interface only for new Anonymous Call mechanism 1 Click on Account Basic 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired valu...

Page 383: ...gth 0 The anonymous call rejection on code and anonymous call rejection off code configured on IP phones are used to activate deactivate the server side anonymous call rejection feature They may vary on different servers Yealink IP phones running firmware version 82 or later support a new Anonymous Call Rejection mechanism The following only describe how to configure the new Anonymous Call Rejecti...

Page 384: ...unt X anonymous_call server_base_only must not be left blank account X anonymous_reject_oncode 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the anonymous call rejection on code for a specific account The IP phone will send the code to activate anonymous call rejection feature on server side when you activate it on the IP phone Example account 1 anonymous_reject_oncode 74 Web User Int...

Page 385: ... web user interface only for new Anonymous Call Rejection mechanism 1 Click on Account Basic 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Anonymous Rejection 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure anonymous call rejection via phone user interface only for new Anonymous Call Rejection mechanism 1 Press Menu Features...

Page 386: ...re is activated on any of the IP phone s line registrations the other line registrations are not affected For more information on Call Forward refer to Call Forward on page 400 The DND on code and DND off code configured on IP phones are used to activate deactivate the server side DND feature They may vary on different servers Return Message When DND This feature defines the return code and the re...

Page 387: ...ustom mode Parameters account X dnd enable account X dnd on_code account X dnd off_code Configure DND Feature Synchronization on a per line basis Parameter account X features dnd feature_key_sy nc local_processing enable y0000000000xx cfg Enable or disable the DND feature Parameter features dnd allow Configure the DND mode Parameter features dnd_mode Configure DND in the phone mode Parameters feat...

Page 388: ...ype linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Configure DND Feature Synchronization Parameters features feature_key_sync enable features dnd feature_key_sync enable features dnd feature_key_sync local_pr ocessing enable Web User Interface Configure DND Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p f eatures forward q load Specify the authorized numbers ...

Page 389: ... activated and users are not allowed to configure DND on the phone 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features feature_key_sync enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to send a SUBSCRIBE message with event as feature event 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features dnd feature_key_sync enable 0 or 1 1 Description E...

Page 390: ...he parameters features feature_key_sync enable and features dnd feature_key_sync enable are set to 1 Enabled The value configured by the parameter account X features dnd feature_key_sync local_processing enable takes precedence over that configured by this parameter It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features dnd_mode 0 or 1 0 Descripti...

Page 391: ...ver when you activate DND feature on the IP phone Example features dnd on_code 71 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features dnd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features dnd_mode is set to 0 Phone except SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND DND On Code Phone User Interface Menu Features DND On Code features dnd off_code String within 32...

Page 392: ...DND DND AccountX DND Status Phone User Interface Menu Features DND AccountX DND Status account X features dnd feature_key_sync local_processing enable 0 or 1 Blank Description Enables or disables the local DND for a specific account when DND is activated 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameters features feature_key_sync enable and features dnd feature_key_sync enable ...

Page 393: ...t on the IP phone Example account 1 dnd off_code 74 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features dnd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features dnd_mode is set to 1 Custom It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND AccountX Off Code Phone User Interface Menu Features DND AccountX Off Code features dnd emergency_enable 0 or...

Page 394: ...fuse_code 404 480 486 or 603 480 Description Configures a return code and reason of SIP response messages when rejecting an incoming call by DND A specific reason is displayed on the caller s phone LCD screen 404 Not Found 480 Temporarily Unavailable 486 Busy Here the caller s phone LCD screen will display the reason Busy Here when the callee enables DND 603 Decline Note For Yealink IP phones it w...

Page 395: ...sion_module X key Y type 3 5 Description Configures a DSS key as a DND DSS key on the IP phone Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 ch...

Page 396: ...is the programable key ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure a DND DSS key via web user inte...

Page 397: ...n Code field 3 Optional Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field b If you mark the Custom radio box 1 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 2 Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field 3 Optional Enter the DND on code in the On Code field ...

Page 398: ... code in the Off Code field 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of DND Emergency 3 Enter the desired value in the DND Authorized Numbers field ...

Page 399: ...n code and the reason when DND is activated via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Return Code When DND 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a DND DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key ...

Page 400: ...en displays a list of accounts registered on the IP phone 2 Press or to select the desired account and then press the Enter soft key 3 Press the Switch soft key to activate DND 4 Optional Enter the DND on code or off code respectively in the On Code or Off Code field 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change You can configure DND in the custom mode for all accounts by pressing the All On soft...

Page 401: ...eased by the other party 0 0s the IP phone will not play a busy tone 3 3s a busy tone is audible for 3 seconds on the IP phone 5 5s Web User Interface Features General Information Busy Tone Delay Seconds Phone User Interface None To configure busy tone delay via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Busy Tone Delay Seconds ...

Page 402: ...mporarily Unavailable 486 Busy Here 603 Decline The following shows an example of the returned reason for the refused call Procedure Return code for refused call can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when refusing a call Parameter features normal_refuse_code Web User...

Page 403: ... 486 Busy Here the caller s phone LCD screen will display the message Busy Here when the callee rejects the incoming call 603 Decline Web User Interface Features General Information Return Code When Refuse Phone User Interface None To specify the return code and the reason when refusing a call via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull d...

Page 404: ...n the early media cannot be played Parameter phone_setting early_media rtp_sniffe r timeout Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting early_media rtp_sniffer timeout 1 0 or integer from 1 to 100 1 Description Configures the time to wait for the IP phone to play the local ringback tone when the early media cannot be played 1 Do not play the local ringba...

Page 405: ...l q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting is_deal180 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to deal with the 180 SIP message received after the 183 SIP message 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the IP phone will resume and play the local ringback tone upon a subsequent 180 message received Web User Interface Features General Information 180 ...

Page 406: ...ges from the IP phone will be sent to the outbound proxy server forcibly Note Procedure Use outbound proxy in dialog can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog Parameter sip use_out_bound_in_dialog Web User Interface Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog Navigate to http phone...

Page 407: ...request messages from the IP phone will be forced to send to the outbound proxy server in a dialog Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X outbound_proxy_enable is set to 1 Enabled and the outbound server address has been correctly configured on the phone Web User Interface Features General Information Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog Phone User Interface None To configure use outbo...

Page 408: ...2 respectively Timer T1 0 5 Timer T2 4 The SIP registration request message will be re transmitted between the IP phone and SIP server The re transmitting and doubling of Timer T1 0 5 will continue until the retransmitting time reaches the Timer T2 4 The total registration request retry time will be less than 64 times of T1 64 0 5 32 The re transmitting interval in sequence is 0 5s 1s 2s 4s 4s 4s ...

Page 409: ...sion timer T2 in seconds Timer T2 represents the maximum retransmitting time of any SIP request message Web User Interface Settings SIP SIP Session Timer T2 2 40s Phone User Interface None sip timer_t4 Float from 2 5 to 60 5 Description Configures the SIP session timer of T4 in seconds T4 represents the maximum duration a message will remain in the network Web User Interface Settings SIP SIP Sessi...

Page 410: ... the initiator is configured as UAS the other client or the SIP server will function as a UAC The session expiration is negotiated via the Session Expires header in the INVITE message The negotiated refresher is always the UAC and it will send an UPDATE request at the negotiated session expiration The value refresher uac included in the UPDATE message means that the UAC performs the refresh Exampl...

Page 411: ...les or disables the session timer for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled IP phone will send periodic UPDATE requests to refresh the session during a call Web User Interface Account Advanced Session Timer Phone User Interface None account X session_timer expires 1 Integer from 30 to 7200 1800 Description Configures the interval in seconds for refreshing the SIP session during a call for a spec...

Page 412: ...ccount X session_timer enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced Session Refresher Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure session timer via web user interface 1 Click on ...

Page 413: ...depended on the parameter features ignore_incoming_call enable When you set the value of the parameter features ignore_incoming_call enable to 1 and if the IP phone receives an incoming call in the idle state the user can only press the corresponding line key the Answer soft key or the OK key to answer the call And the IP phone will enter the dialing screen if the user picking up the handset press...

Page 414: ...face None Phone User Interface None Call Hold Call hold provides a service of placing an active call on hold The purpose of call hold is to pause activity on the existing call so that you can use the phone for another task for example to place or receive another call When a call is placed on hold the IP phones send an INVITE request with HOLD SDP to request remote parties to stop sending media and...

Page 415: ... interval Specify whether RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 outgoing hold signaling is used Parameter sip rfc2543_hold MAC cfg Specify whether to use inactive hold signaling Parameter account X hold_use_inactive Web User Interface Configure the call hold tone and call hold tone delay Specify whether RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 outgoing hold signaling is used Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q lo...

Page 416: ... Web User Interface Features General Information Play Hold Tone Delay Phone User Interface None features play_hold_tone interval Integer from 3 to 3600 30 Description Configures the time in seconds between subsequent call held tones If it is set to 3 3s and the value of the parameter features play_hold_tone delay is set to 30 30s the IP phone will begin to play a hold tone after you place a call o...

Page 417: ...ne enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Play Held Tone Delay Phone User Interface None features play_held_tone interval Integer from 3 to 3600 60 Description Configures the time in seconds between subsequent call held tones If it is set to 3 3s and the value of the parameter features play_held_tone delay is set to 30 30s the IP phone will begin to play a held ...

Page 418: ...o use inactive outgoing hold signaling 0 Disabled SDP media direction attribute a sendonly is used when placing a call on hold 1 Enabled SDP media direction attribute a inactive is used when placing a call on hold RTP packets will not be sent or received Note It works only if the value of the parameter sip rfc2543_hold is set to 0 Disabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is t...

Page 419: ...e pull down list of RFC 2543 Hold 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Music on Hold MoH Music on Hold MoH is the business practice of playing recorded music to fill the silence that would be heard by the party who has been placed on hold To use this feature specify a SIP URI pointing to a MoH server account When a call is placed on hold the IP phone will send an INVITE message to the specified Mo...

Page 420: ...Configure music on hold on a per line basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p account adv q load acc 0 Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default account X music_server_uri 1 SIP URI within 256 characters Blank Description Configures the SIP URI that provides the audio to play for the held party for a specific account The URI points to a Music On Hold MoH serve...

Page 421: ...Calling the Music On Hold server before holding the call 1 Calling the Music On Hold server after holding the call Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure MoH via web u...

Page 422: ...ing call after a period of ring time Call forward can be configured on a phone or a per line basis depending on the call forward mode There are two call forward modes Phone default Call forward feature is effective for the phone system You can apply call forward to all line registrations on the phone Custom Call forward feature can be configured for each or all accounts You can specify individual ...

Page 423: ...dicate who the call was from and from which phone number it was forwarded Forward International Forward international allows users to forward an incoming call to an international telephone number the prefix is 00 This feature is enabled by default Forward Emergency Forward emergency allows the incoming calls from some authorized numbers not to be forwarded when the call forward feature is enabled ...

Page 424: ...account X timeout_fwd on_code account X timeout_fwd off_code Configure Call Forward Feature Synchronization on a per line basis Parameter account X features forward feature_ key_sync local_processing enable y0000000000xx cfg Enable or disable the call forward feature Parameter features fwd allow Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is activated Parameters features forward emergency ena...

Page 425: ...on_code forward no_answer off_code Configure diversion history info feature Parameter features fwd_diversion_enable Configure forward international Parameter forward international enable Configure Call Forward Feature Synchronization Parameters features feature_key_sync enable features forward feature_key_sync e nable features forward feature_key_sync lo cal_processing enable Web User Interface Sp...

Page 426: ...d Values Default features fwd allow 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the call forward feature 0 Disabled call forward feature is not available to the users 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features feature_key_sync enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to send a SUBSCRIBE message with event as feature event 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Int...

Page 427: ...1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameters features feature_key_sync enable and features forward feature_key_sync enable are set to 1 Enabled The value configured by the parameter account X features forward feature_key_sync local_processing enable takes precedence over that configured by this parameter Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X features forward fe...

Page 428: ...oming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number configured by the parameter account X always_fwd target immediately Note It works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 1 Custom It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward AccountX Always ...

Page 429: ...wd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 1 Custom It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward AccountX Always Forward On Code Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Forward AccountX Always Forward On Code account X always_fwd off_code 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the always ...

Page 430: ...AccountX Busy Forward On Off Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Forward AccountX Busy Forward Busy Forward account X busy_fwd target 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the destination number of the busy forward for a specific account Example account 1 busy_fwd target 3602 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value ...

Page 431: ...e IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature for a specific account on the IP phone Example account 1 busy_fwd off_code 75 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 1 Custom It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Fe...

Page 432: ...applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward AccountX No Answer Forward Target Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Forward AccountX No Answer Forward Forward to account X timeout_fwd timeout 1 Integer from 0 to 20 2 Description Configures ring times N to wait before forwarding incoming calls for a specific account Incoming calls will be forwarded when no...

Page 433: ...u Features Call Forward AccountX No Answer Forward On Code account X timeout_fwd off_code 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the no answer forward off code to deactivate the server side no answer forward feature for a specific account The IP phone will send the no answer forward off code to the server when you deactivate no answer forward feature for a specific account on t...

Page 434: ...d feature is activated Multiple numbers are separated by commas Example features forward emergency authorized_number 1014 1015 Note It works only if the values of the parameters features fwd allow and features forward emergency enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward Forward Authorized Numbers Phone User Interface None forward always enable 0 or 1 0 Description ...

Page 435: ...lways Forward Forward to forward always on_code String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the always forward on code to activate the server side always forward feature The IP phone will send the always forward on code and the pre configured destination number configured by the parameter forward always target to the server when you activate always forward feature on the phone system ...

Page 436: ...0 or 1 0 Description Triggers the busy forward feature to on or off for the phone system 0 Off 1 On incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number configured by the parameter forward busy target when the callee is busy Note It works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 0 Phone except SIP T19 P E2 IP...

Page 437: ...o 1 and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 0 Phone except SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward Busy Forward On Code Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Forward Busy Forward On Code forward busy off_code String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the busy forward off code to deactivate the server side busy forward feature The IP ph...

Page 438: ...rd no_answer target String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the destination number of the no answer forward for the phone system Example forward no_answer target 3603 Note It works only if the values of parameters features fwd allow and forward no_answer enable are set to 1 and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 0 Phone except SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interf...

Page 439: ...atures fwd allow and forward no_answer enable are set to 1 and value of the parameter features fwd_mode is set to 0 Phone except SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Forward DND Forward No Answer Forward On Code Phone User Interface Menu Features Call Forward No Answer Forward On Code forward no_answer off_code String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the no answer fo...

Page 440: ...ing calls to international numbers the prefix is 00 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note For Yealink IP phones it works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Fwd International Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin FWD International FWD International 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T2...

Page 441: ... destination number you want to forward in the Target field 3 Optional Enter the on code and off code in the On Code and Off Code fields 4 Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull down list of After Ring Time 0 120s only for the no answer forward b If you mark the Custom radio box 1 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 2 Mark the desired radio box in th...

Page 442: ...nly for the no answer forward 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure Diversion History Info feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Diversion History Info 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure forward international via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information ...

Page 443: ...ield 3 Optional Enter the always forward on code and off code respectively in the On Code and Off Code field b If you select Busy Forward 1 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Busy Forward field 2 Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when the IP phone is busy in the Forward to field 3 Optional Enter the busy forward on code and off...

Page 444: ...f Code field You can also configure the always forward for all accounts After the always forward was configured for a specific account do the following 1 Press or to highlight the Always Forward field 2 Press the All Lines soft key The LCD screen prompts Copy to all lines 3 Press the OK soft key to accept the change b If you select Busy Forward you can configure it for a specific account 1 Press o...

Page 445: ...e Save soft key to accept the change Call Transfer Call transfer enables IP phones to transfer an existing call to a third party For example if party A is in an active call with party B party A can transfer this call to party C the third party Then party B will begin a new call with party C and party A will disconnect IP phones support call transfer using the REFER method specified in RFC 3515 and...

Page 446: ... type when the entered transferee numbers match the dial plan Parameter dialplan transfer mode Web User Interface Specify whether to complete the transfer through on hook Configure semi attended transfer feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p fe atures transfer q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default transfer blind_tran_on_hook_enable 0 or 1 1 Desc...

Page 447: ...ransfer On Hook Phone User Interface None transfer semi_attend_tran_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the semi attended transfer 0 Disabled When the user presses the Trans Transfer soft key after hearing the ringback tone the IP phone will blind transfer the call 1 Enabled When the user presses the Trans Transfer soft key after hearing the ringback tone the IP phone will transfer the...

Page 448: ... Blind Transfer on Hook and Attended Transfer on Hook 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Conference You can use the IP phones to set up a conference with other two parties using the phone s local conference or set up a conference with multiple participants which is called network conference Procedure Conference type can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration...

Page 449: ...e is set up with multiple parties via the server Web User Interface Account Advanced Conference Type Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure the conference type via web user interface 1 Click ...

Page 450: ...al enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the local conference for the IP phone 0 Disabled the Conf Conference soft key will disappear during a call and the CONF key conference DSS key will not work Local conference cannot be set up even though the value of the parameter account X conf_type is set to 0 Local Conference 1 Enabled you can set up a local conference with other two parties It ...

Page 451: ...n Enables or disables the IP phone to set up a three way conference directly after the second party answers the call 0 Disabled the first call is placed on hold The user needs to press the Conf Conference soft key CONF key or conference DSS key again to set up a conference after the second party answers the call 1 Enabled The second party joins a conference with the first party after answering the...

Page 452: ...on Configures the network conference URI for a specific account Example account 1 conf_uri conference example com Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X conf_type is set to 2 Network Conference Web User Interface Account Advanced Conference URI Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P...

Page 453: ...ference initiator drops the conference call For network conference if any party leaves the conference the remaining parties are still connected For more information on network conference refer to Network Conference on page 429 Procedure Transfer on conference hang up can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the transfer on co...

Page 454: ...e of the parameter account X conf_type is set to 0 Local Conference and the value of the parameter features conference local enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features Transfer Transfer on Conference Hang up Phone User Interface None To configure transfer on conference hang up via web user interface 1 Click on Features Transfer 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Tran...

Page 455: ...rface Configure the transfer mode via dsskey Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features transfer q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer dsskey_deal_type 0 1 or 2 2 Description Configures the transfer mode for DSS key When the user presses the DSS Key during a call the DSS Key behavior depends on the transfer mode 0 New Call 1 Attended Tran...

Page 456: ...or example party A 1001 has two calls on line 1 one with party B 1011 and the other with party C 1012 If party A transfers the call with party B by pressing the Trans Transfer soft key a Transfer to screen will display on the phone In this case party A can select to transfer the call to a new number or party C 1012 It is not applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Procedure ...

Page 457: ...ey or TRAN TRANSFER key 0 Disabled the user cannot transfer the current call to another existing call 1 Enabled the user can transfer the current call to a new call or another existing call Note It is not applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Web User Interface Features General Information Allow Trans Exist Call Phone User Interface None To configure allow trans exist call...

Page 458: ... the line key You may need to press the More soft key to see the DPickup soft key As shown below Note Procedure Directed call pickup can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure the directed call pickup code on a per line basis Parameter account X direct_pickup_code Configure directed call pickup features on a phone basis Parameters featu...

Page 459: ...re on a phone basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p f eatures callpickup q load Phone User Interface Assign a directed call pickup DSS key Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default account X direct_pickup_code 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the directed call pickup code for a specific account Example account 1 direct_pickup_code 9...

Page 460: ...e on a phone basis Example features pickup direct_pickup_code 97 Note The directed call pickup code configured on a per line basis configured by the parameter account X direct_pickup_code takes precedence over that configured on a phone basis configured by the parameter features pickup direct_pickup_code Web User Interface Features Pick up Park Directed Call Pickup Code Phone User Interface None 1...

Page 461: ...ey X Type linekey X line 1 programablekey X line 2 expansion_module X key Y line 3 Refer to the following content Description Configures the desired line to apply the directed call pickup DSS key Permitted Values 1 to 16 for SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G 1 to 12 for SIP T52S T42G T42S 1 to 6 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G 1 to 3 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G 1 to 2 for SIP T21 P E2 1 Line 1 2 Line ...

Page 462: ...able to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Value Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Value linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note EXT key is only app...

Page 463: ... ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure a directed call pickup DSS key via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key or Programable Key 2 In the desired DSS key field select Direct Pickup from the pull down list of Type 3 Enter the directed call pickup code followed by the speci...

Page 464: ...ed value from the pull down list of Directed Call Pickup 3 Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a directed pickup DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 4 Press or or the Switch soft k...

Page 465: ...pickup requires a group pickup code which can be configured on a phone or a per line basis When you enable group call pickup the LCD screen will display a GPickup soft key when you pick up the handset press the Speakerphone key or press the line key As shown below Procedure Group call pickup can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure th...

Page 466: ...ickup code on a per line basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p acco unt adv q load acc 0 Configure group call pickup feature on a phone basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p featu res callpickup q load Phone User Interface Assign a group call pickup DSS key Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features pickup group_pickup_enable 0 or 1 0 Descr...

Page 467: ...ithin 32 characters Blank Description Configures the group call pickup code on a phone basis Example features pickup group_pickup_code 98 Note The group call pickup code configured on a per line basis configured by the parameter account X group_pickup_code takes precedence over that configured on a phone basis configured by the parameter features pickup group_pickup_code Web User Interface Feature...

Page 468: ...u Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X line 1 programablekey X line 2 expansion_module X key Y line 3 Refer to the following content Description Configures the desired line to apply the group call pickup DSS key Permitted Values 1 to 16 for SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G 1 to 12 for SIP T52S T42G T42S 1 to 6 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G 1 to 3 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G 1 to 2 for SIP T2...

Page 469: ...Line Key X Value linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Label Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Ke...

Page 470: ... X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure a group call pickup DSS key via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key or Programable Key 2 In the desired DSS key field select Group Pickup from the pull down list of Type 3 Enter the group call pickup code in the Valu...

Page 471: ...l down list of Group Call Pickup 3 Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a group pickup DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select GPickup from the Key...

Page 472: ...or blf pickup feature is enabled a user can also pick up an incoming call by pressing the Pick Up soft key For more information on visual alert for blf pickup refer to Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup on page 537 It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Note Example of the dialog info carried in NOTIFY message xml version 1 0 dialog info xmlns urn ietf params xml ns dialog info ve...

Page 473: ... using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure dialog info call pickup Parameter account X dialoginfo_callpickup Web User Interface Configure dialog info call pickup Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p acc ount adv q load acc 0 Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default account X dialoginfo_callpickup 1 0 or 1 0 Descripti...

Page 474: ... Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Dialog Info Call Pickup 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Recent Call In Dialing Recent call in dialing feature allows users to view the placed calls list when the phone is on the dialing screen lifts the handset presses the Speakerphone key or desired line key Users c...

Page 475: ...Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p cont acts favorite q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default super_search recent_call 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables Recent Call in Dialing feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled users can view the placed calls list when the phone is on the dialing screen Web User Interface Directory Setting Recent Call In Dialing Phone U...

Page 476: ...recall DSS key When you press the recall DSS key you will place a call to the phone number that last called you Procedure Recall DSS key can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Assign a recall DSS key Parameters linekey X type programablekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X...

Page 477: ...face Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Inte...

Page 478: ... T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure a recall DSS key via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key or Programable Key 2 In the desired DSS key field select ReCall from the pull down list of Type 3 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a rec...

Page 479: ...efault features call_num_filter String within 99 characters Description Configures the characters the IP phone filters when dialing If the dialed number contains configured characters the IP phone will automatically filter these characters when dialing Example features call_num_filter If you dial 3 61 the IP phone will filter the character and then dial out 361 Note If it is left blank the IP phon...

Page 480: ...eve number park retrieve code from which the call can be retrieved after parking successfully Users can park calls on the extension known as call park orbit by pressing the Park soft key or a call park DSS key You need to configure the call park code for the Park soft key or the call park DSS key Call park code configured for the Park soft key will also apply to the call park DSS key If the call i...

Page 481: ... ble Assign a call park DSS key Assign a retrieve park DSS key Parameters linekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X line expansion_module X key Y line linekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Configure call park feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features callpickup q load Assig...

Page 482: ...the IP phone to display the Park soft key during a call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the Retrieve soft key will also be displayed on the dialing screen Web User Interface Features Pick up Park Call Park Phone User Interface None features call_park park_code String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the call park code for the Park soft key This call park code will also apply to the call park...

Page 483: ...to the specific user or retrieve the call parked from the specific user 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter features call_park park_mode is set to 1 FAC and you have configured the call park code park retrieve code Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features call_park line_restriction enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to park retriev...

Page 484: ...ey on the IP phone The digit 10 stands for the key type Call Park Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X line 1 expansion_module X key Y line 2 Refer to the following content Description C...

Page 485: ...ll park code Example linekey 2 value 68 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Value Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Value linekey X label 1 expansion_module X key Y label 2 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the la...

Page 486: ...ues linekey X type 1 expansion_module X key Y type 2 56 Description Configures a DSS key as a retrieve park DSS key on the IP phone Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X line 1 expansion_...

Page 487: ...e code Example linekey 2 value 88 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Value Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Value linekey X label 1 expansion_module X key Y label 2 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label di...

Page 488: ...for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure call park feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features Pick up Park 2 Select the desired call park mode from the pull down list of Call Park Mode 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Call Park 4 Optional Enter the call park code in the Call Park Code fiel...

Page 489: ...configure a call park DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Call Park from the Key Type field 5 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field 6 Optional Enter the string that will appear o...

Page 490: ...ion information will be hidden and the IP phone LCD screen presents anonymous 2 If there is not any Privacy id header in the INVITE request the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P Preferred Identity header 3 If there is not P Preferred Identity header in the INVITE request the IP phone presents the caller identification derived from the FROM header Caller ID source PA...

Page 491: ...he caller identification information will be hidden and the IP phone LCD screen presents anonymous 2 If there is not any Privacy id header in the INVITE request the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P Preferred Identity header 3 If there is not P Preferred Identity header in the INVITE request the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P Asser...

Page 492: ...ss Privacy header field Parameter account X cid_source_privacy Specify whether to process the P Preferred Identity PPI header for caller identity presentation Parameter account X cid_source_ppi y0000000000x x cfg Specify the priority order for the sources of caller identity information Parameter sip cid_source preference Web User Interface Configure the presentation of the caller identity Navigate...

Page 493: ... a specific account 0 Disabled the IP phone doesn t process Privacy header 1 Enabled the caller identification information will be hidden and the IP phone LCD screen presents anonymity if there is a Privacy id in the INVITE request Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X cid_source_ppi 1 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to process the P Preferred Identity P...

Page 494: ...ferred Identity and Remote Party ID RPID It works only if the value of the parameter account X cid_source is set to 6 PREFERENCE Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure...

Page 495: ...idden and the IP phone LCD screen presents anonymous 2 If there is not any Privacy id header in the 18X or 200OK response the IP phone checks and presents the connected line identification from the P Asserted Identity header 3 If there is not P Asserted Identity header in the I8X or 200OK response the IP phone presents the connected line identification from the Remote Party ID header If no the IP ...

Page 496: ... a specific account 0 PAI RPID 1 Dialed Digits 2 RFC 4916 When the RFC 4916 is enabled on the IP phone the caller sends the SIP request message which contains the from change tag in the Supported header The caller then receives an UPDATE message from the callee and displays the identity in the From header Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X cid_source_privacy 1 0 or 1 1 Des...

Page 497: ...he call You can mute the microphone of the active audio device during an active call and then the other party cannot hear you Mute while dialing ringing You can mute the microphone of the active audio device when the phone is on the pre dialing dialing calling ringing screen The call is automatically muted when setting up successfully This feature is available for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones ...

Page 498: ...e microphone on the calling screen is only applicable to the SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G IP phones Note For SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones you are allowed to activate the mute feature on the pre dialing dialing calling ringing screen only if the value of the parameter features keep_mute enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Allow Mute Phone User In...

Page 499: ...ute feature Parameter features keep_mute enable Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features keep_mute enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the keep mute feature for the IP phone 0 Disabled mute feature is automatically deactivated when the active call ends 1 Enabled the mute state is kept until you change the mute state manually or the phone restarts N...

Page 500: ...indicator on the supervisor s phone indicates that the user s phone is in use When the monitored user is idle the supervisor can press the intercom DSS key to automatically connect with a preconfigured target extension for outgoing intercom calls When the monitored user receives an incoming call the supervisor can press the intercom DSS key to pick up the call directly To pick up the call you have...

Page 501: ...X line programablekey X line expansion_module X key Y line linekey X value programablekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X pickup_value programablekey X pickup_value expansion_module X key Y pickup_value linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Assign an intercom DSS key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p d...

Page 502: ...ce None Phone User Interface None features intercom subscribe enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables intercom subscription for the IP phone 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features intercom mode 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the intercom mode 0 SIP 1 FAC the feature access code is configured by th...

Page 503: ...linekey X type 1 programablekey X type 2 expansion_module X key Y type 3 14 Description Configures a DSS key as an intercom DSS key Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X line 1 programablekey X line 2 expansion_module ...

Page 504: ...ures DSS Keys Line Key X Account ID linekey X value 1 programablekey X value 2 expansion_module X key Y value 3 String within 99 characters Description Configures the intercom number Example linekey 2 value 1008 Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line key Programable Key Value Phone User Interface Menu Features DS...

Page 505: ...User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Label linekey X shortlabel X ranges from 1 to 21 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key Note It is only applicable to SIP T52S IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Short Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Short Label 1 X is the line key ID For S...

Page 506: ...or or the Switch soft key to select Intercom from the Type field 4 Select the desired line from the Account ID field 5 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 6 Enter the remote extension number in the Value field 7 Optional Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field This field appears only if intercom subscription feature is enabled 8 Press ...

Page 507: ...g Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure incoming intercom call feature Parameters features intercom allow features intercom mute features intercom tone features intercom barge Specify the channel mode to use when receiving an incoming intercom call Parameter features intercom headset_prior enable Web User Interface Configure incoming intercom call feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress s...

Page 508: ... hear you Note It works only if the value of the parameter features intercom allow is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features Intercom Intercom Mute Phone User Interface Menu Features Intercom Intercom Mute features intercom tone 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when answering an intercom call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of ...

Page 509: ...one_setting call_appearance calls_per_linekey is greater than 1 Web User Interface Features Intercom Intercom Barge Phone User Interface Menu Features Intercom Intercom Barge features intercom headset_prior enable 0 or 1 1 Description Configures the channel mode to use when receiving an incoming intercom call 0 Speaker Mode 1 Headset Mode it works only if you connect the headset to the IP phone an...

Page 510: ...ll timeout can be configured using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the duration time in the ringback state Parameter phone_setting ringback_timeout Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting ringback_timeout Integer from 0 to 3600 180 Description Configures the duration time in seconds in the ri...

Page 511: ...nterface None Phone User Interface None Send user phone When placing a call the IP phone will send an INVITE request to the proxy server Send user phone feature allows adding user phone to the SIP header of the INVITE message Example of a SIP INVITE message INVITE sip 101 10 2 1 48 5060 user phone SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 3 20 6 5060 branch z9hG4bK2475812834 From 1010 sip 1010 10 2 1 48 5060 tag...

Page 512: ...uration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default account X enable_user_equal_phone 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to add user phone to the SIP header of the INVITE message for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced Send user phone Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T5...

Page 513: ... a SIP REGISTER message REGISTER sip 10 2 1 48 5060 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 3 20 14 5060 branch z9hG4bK3593117201 From 11 sip 11 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 2788360609 To 11 sip 11 10 2 1 48 5060 Call ID 1_1863786852 10 3 20 14 CSeq 2 REGISTER Contact sip 11 10 3 20 14 5060 line cc75882e976e208 Allow INVITE INFO PRACK ACK BYE CANCEL OPTIONS NOTIFY REGISTER SUBSCRIBE REFER PUBLISH UPDATE MESSAGE Max Forw...

Page 514: ...ameter Permitted Values Default account X register_mac 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to add MAC address to the SIP header of the REGISTER message for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced SIP Send MAC Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P...

Page 515: ...for each phone model Phone Model Line Number Description SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G 0 15 0 15 stand for line1 line16 SIP T52S T42G T42S 0 11 0 11 stand for line1 line12 SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G 0 5 0 5 stand for line1 line6 SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G 0 2 0 2 stand for line1 line3 SIP T21 P E2 0 1 0 1 stand for line1 line2 SIP T19 P E2 0 0 stand for line1 Example of a SIP REGISTER message REGIST...

Page 516: ...a per line basis Parameter account X register_line Web User Interface Configure SIP send line on a per line basis Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p account adv q load acc 0 Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default account X register_line 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to add line number to the SIP header of the REGISTER message for ...

Page 517: ...rs an account user name 1010 on the phone the phone will send 1010 23 instead of 1010 in the REGISTER message or INVITE message to SIP server Example of a SIP REGISTER message INVITE sip 2 10 2 1 48 5060 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 3 20 6 5060 branch z9hG4bK1867789050 From 1010 sip 1010 23 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 1945988802 To sip 2 10 2 1 48 5060 Call ID 0_2336101648 10 3 20 6 CSeq 1 INVITE Contact sip...

Page 518: ...tures general q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default sip use_23_as_pound 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to reserve the pound sign in the user name 0 Disabled convert the pound sign into 23 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Reserve in User Name Phone User Interface None To configure reserve in user name feature...

Page 519: ... Configure password dial feature Parameters features password_dial enable features password_dial prefix features password_dial length Web User Interface Configure password dial feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features password_dial enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables th...

Page 520: ...terisks Example features password_dial length 3 If you set the prefix to 12 configured by the parameter features password_dial prefix and the length to 3 when you want to dial the number 123456 the entered number is displayed as 12 6 on the LCD screen Note It works only if the value of the parameter features password_dial enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information P...

Page 521: ...reboot can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure unregister when reboot Parameter account X unregister_on_reboot Web User Interface Configure unregister when reboot Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p account adv q load acc 0 Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default account X unregister_on_reboot 1...

Page 522: ...IP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure unregister when reboot via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Unregister When Reboot 4 Click Confirm to accept the change 100 Reliable Retransmission As described in RFC 3262 100rel tag is for reliability of provisiona...

Page 523: ...af45b3f89beae95e913171 algorithm MD5 cnonce 0a4f113b qop auth nc 00000001 Content Type application sdp Allow INVITE INFO PRACK ACK BYE CANCEL OPTIONS NOTIFY REGISTER SUBSCRIBE REFER PUBLISH UPDATE MESSAGE Max Forwards 70 User Agent Yealink SIP T46G 28 82 0 20 Supported 100rel Allow Events talk hold conference refer check sync Content Length 302 Procedure 100 Reliable Retransmission can be configur...

Page 524: ... 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure 100 reliable retransmission via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Retransmission 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Reboot in Talking Re...

Page 525: ...feature s general q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features reboot_in_talk_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the phone to reboot during a call when it receives a reboot request by action URI 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter features action_uri_limit_ip is set to any or trusted IP address es and it is not...

Page 526: ...ng the HEADSET key directly If you disable answer by hand feature you need to press the corresponding line key or the Answer soft key to answer an incoming call after picking up the handset pressing the Speakerphone key or pressing the HEADSET key Procedure Answer by hand can be configured using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure answer by ha...

Page 527: ...ey Recording Record and URL Record on page 607 Note The recorded calls are saved in wav format and include a date time stamp the other party s number IP address name or the first person s number IP address name you called duration of the call and the recording file size For example 20160422 1515 Bob was created on Apr 22 2016 at 15 15 and you have a call with Bob Recorded calls can be played on ei...

Page 528: ...ported Telecommunications Applications uaCSTA is explained in detail in Using CSTA for SIP Phone User Agents uaCSTA and Services for Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications Phase III The uaCSTA feature on the phone may be used for remote control of the phone from computer applications such as PC softphone You can use the application to control the phone to perform basic call operations ...

Page 529: ... Web User Interface Features Remote Control CSTA Control Phone User Interface None To configure uaCSTA feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features Remote Control 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of the CSTA Control 3 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Click OK to reboot the phone Quick Login...

Page 530: ... quick_login Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default wui quick_login 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the quick login feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled you can quickly log into the web user interface using a request URI for example https admin admin 192 168 0 10 Note It works only if the value of the parameter static wui https_enable is set to 1 Enabled Web Use...

Page 531: ...configured using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the CFG configuration file version information Parameter features custom_version_info Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features custom_version_info String Blank Description Configures the version information of the CFG configuration file After configurati...

Page 532: ...Administrator s Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 510 ...

Page 533: ...p Field BLF Busy Lamp Field BLF List Hide Feature Access Codes Automatic Call Distribution ACD Shared Call Appearance SCA Bridge Lines Appearance BLA Message Waiting Indicator MWI Short Message Service SMS Multicast Paging Dsskey Recording Record and URL Record Hot Desking Logon Wizard Action URL Action URI Server Redundancy Static DNS Cache Real Time Transport Protocol RTP Ports TR 069 Device Man...

Page 534: ...isioning server and specify the access URL of the file Menu xml in the configuration file You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for remote XML phone book template You can also obtain the remote XML phone book template online http support yealink com documentFront forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage For more information on obtaining the remote phone book template refer to Obtaining Boot Files Co...

Page 535: ...e of a remote phone book between Title and Title MenuItem indicates the start of specifying a department file and MenuItem indicates the end of specifying a department file SoftKeyItem indicates the start of specifying an XML file and SoftKeyItem indicates the end of specifying an XML file for the digit keys key or key In the remote phone book contacts screen pressing the configured digit keys key...

Page 536: ...d the following strings to the file Each starts on a separate line MenuItem Name Department1 Name URL http 10 2 9 1 99 Department xml URL MenuItem 3 For each XML file that you want to add add the following strings to the file Each starts on a separate line SoftKeyItem Name Name URL http 10 2 9 1 99 Department xml URL SoftKeyItem ...

Page 537: ...0000xx c fg Specify the access URL and the display name of the remote phone book Parameters remote_phonebook data X url remote_phonebook data X name remote_phonebook display_name Specify whether to query the entry name from the remote phone book for outgoing incoming calls Parameter features remote_phonebook enable Specify how often the IP phone refreshes the local cache of the remote phone book P...

Page 538: ...2 T21 P E2 T23P T23G T40P T40G IP phones the size of a remote phone book file should be less than 750K For T27P T27G T41P T41S T42G T42S T46G T46S T48G T48S IP phones the size of a remote phone book file should be less than 1 5M Web User Interface Directory Remote Phone Book Remote URL Phone User Interface None remote_phonebook data X name X ranges from 1 to 5 String within 99 characters Blank Des...

Page 539: ..._phonebook enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to perform a remote phone book search for an incoming or outgoing call and display the matched results on the LCD screen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory Remote Phone Book Incoming Outgoing Call Lookup Phone User Interface None features remote_phonebook flash_time 0 Integer from 3600 to 1296000 21600 Descripti...

Page 540: ...e phone book 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To specify access URL of the remote phone book via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Remote Phone Book 2 Enter the access URL in the Remote URL field 3 Enter the name in the Display Name field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure incoming outgoing call lookup and update time interval via web user...

Page 541: ...tory of the corporation using IP phones Therefore they do not have to maintain the directory locally Users can search and dial out from the LDAP directory and save LDAP entries to the local directory LDAP entries displayed on the IP phone are read only which cannot be added edited or deleted by users When an LDAP server is properly configured the IP phone can look up entries from the LDAP server i...

Page 542: ...dc dc Domain component company Company or organization name telephoneNumber Office phone number mobile mobilephoneNumber Mobile or cellular phone number ipPhone IPphoneNumber Home phone number For more information on LDAP refer to LDAP Directory on Yealink IP Phones Procedure LDAP can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure LDAP...

Page 543: ... X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Configure LDAP Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p contacts LDAP q load Assign an LDAP DSS key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dsskey q load model 0 Phone User Interface Assign an LDAP DSS key Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enable...

Page 544: ... within 99 characters Blank Description Configures the search criteria for looking up LDAP contact names The symbol in the filter stands for any character The symbol in the filter stands for the name entered by the user Example ldap name_filter cn sn When the cn or sn of the LDAP contact matches the entered name the record will be displayed on the LCD screen ldap name_filter cn sn When the cn of t...

Page 545: ... and the mobile of the LDAP contact matches the entered number the record will be displayed on the phone LCD screen Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory LDAP LDAP Number Filter Phone User Interface None ldap tls_mode 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the connection mode between the LDAP server and the IP phone 0 LDAP Unencryp...

Page 546: ...escription Configures the port of the LDAP server Example ldap port 389 Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory LDAP Port Phone User Interface None ldap base String within 99 characters Blank Description Configures the LDAP search base which corresponds to the location of the LDAP phone book from which the LDAP search request be...

Page 547: ...name Phone User Interface None ldap password String within 99 characters Blank Description Configures the password used to login the LDAP server This parameter can be left blank in case the server allows anonymous to login Otherwise you will need to provide the password to login the LDAP server Example ldap password secret Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 En...

Page 548: ...butes separated by spaces Example ldap name_attr cn sn This requires the cn and sn attributes set for each contact record on the LDAP server Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory LDAP LDAP Name Attributes Phone User Interface None ldap numb_attr String within 99 characters Blank Description Configures the number attributes of ...

Page 549: ...AP Display Name Phone User Interface None ldap version 2 or 3 3 Description Configures the LDAP protocol version supported by the IP phone The version must be the same as the version assigned on the LDAP server Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory LDAP Protocol Phone User Interface None ldap call_in_lookup 0 or 1 0 Descriptio...

Page 550: ...bles the IP phone to sort the search results in alphabetical order or numerical order 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Directory LDAP LDAP Sorting Results Phone User Interface None ldap incoming_call_special_search enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to search the telephone numbers star...

Page 551: ...p numb_display_mode 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the display mode of the attribute name for the LDAP contact number 0 NumberN N is an increasing number for example Number1 Number2 Number3 1 Attribute name pushed by server Note It works only if the value of the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None ldap customize_label String within 99 charac...

Page 552: ...LDAP DSS key on the IP phone Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on th...

Page 553: ...52S T27P T27G X 1 21 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 2 X is the programable key ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y...

Page 554: ...tor a specific user for status changes on IP phones For example you can configure a BLF DSS key on a supervisor s phone to monitor the IP phone user status busy or idle When the monitored user places a call a busy indicator on the supervisor s phone indicates that the user s phone is in use You can customize BLF LED status when the supervisor s phone and the monitored phone are in different status...

Page 555: ...38 From 1010 sip 1010 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 2493044525 To sip 1011 10 2 1 48 5060 tag 2527548726 Call ID 0_3538292381 10 3 20 1 CSeq 2 SUBSCRIBE Contact sip 1010 10 3 20 1 5060 Accept application dialog info xml Max Forwards 70 User Agent Yealink SIP T46G 28 82 0 20 Expires 30 Event dialog Content Length 0 Example of a NOTIFY message state confirmed state shows the call has been established NOTIFY si...

Page 556: ...og dialog info Procedure BLF can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure the period of the BLF subscription Parameter account X blf subscribe_period Configure the event of the BLF subscription Parameter account X blf subscribe_event Configure whether to handle NOTIFY messages out of the BLF dialog Parameter account X out_dialog_blf_enable...

Page 557: ...er Interface Account Advanced Subscribe Period Seconds Phone User Interface None account X blf subscribe_event 1 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the event of the BLF subscription for a specific account 0 dialog 1 presence Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X out_dialog_blf_enable 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables t...

Page 558: ...o configure BLF subscription via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Enter the desired period of BLF subscription in the Subscribe Period Seconds field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure out dialog BLF via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of...

Page 559: ... page 434 Ring Type for BLF Pickup Ring type for BLF pickup allows you to configure a different ring tone to distinguish the incoming call on your phone from that on the monitored phone It helps clearly notify you of the ringing state of a monitored phone To use this feature you need to enable audio alert for BLF pickup feature in advance Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the ...

Page 560: ...ick up Park Visual Alert for BLF Pickup Phone User Interface None features pickup blf_audio_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to play an audio alert when the monitored user receives an incoming call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features Pick up Park Audio Alert for BLF Pickup Phone User Interface None feature...

Page 561: ...r 3 2 Description Configures the display method of the call party information on the visual prompt 0 Name 1 Number 2 Name Number 3 Number Name Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only is the value of the parameter features pickup blf_visual_enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup ...

Page 562: ...ion module EXP50 connected to SIP T54S T52S IP phones EXP40 connected to SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S IP phones EXP20 connected to SIP T29G T27P T27G IP phones The following table lists the LED statuses of the BLF DSS key when BLF LED Mode is set to 0 1 2 3 or 4 respectively The default value of BLF LED mode is 0 BLF LED mode feature is also applicable to BLF list DSS key For more information on BLF Li...

Page 563: ...LED Mode is set to 2 LED Status Description Fast flashing red 200ms The monitored user receives an incoming call Solid red The monitored user is dialing The monitored user is talking The monitored user s conversation is placed on hold This LED status requires server support Slow flashing red 1s The call is parked against the monitored user s phone number Off The monitored user is idle The monitore...

Page 564: ...tral Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure BLF LED mode Parameter features blf_led_mode Web User Interface Configure BLF LED mode Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p f eatures general q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features blf_led_mode 0 1 2 3 or 4 0 Description Configures BLF LED mode and provides five kinds of definitio...

Page 565: ...rted when pressing the BLF BLF List DSS keys newcall dial out the phone number btransfer transfer the active call to the monitored user without consulting ctransfer transfer the active call to the monitored user with prior consulting pickup pick up the call directly bargein barge in and set up a conference call custom EDK macros for example 1234 Tinvite execute a series of macro action strings Pro...

Page 566: ...BLF LED status icon colors and BLF BLF List DSS key behavior when the monitored user is calling out Parameters blf enhanced callout enable blf enhanced callout led blf enhanced callout callin action blf enhanced callout talking action blf enhanced callout idle action Configure BLF LED status icon colors and BLF BLF List DSS key behavior when the monitored user is talking Parameters blf enhanced ta...

Page 567: ...b User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced idle led String Blank Description Configures the custom BLF BLF List DSS key LED status icon colors when the monitored user is idle This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key Example blf enhanced idle led LEDg1000o For SIP T54S T52S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27P T27G T23P T23 G T21 P E2...

Page 568: ...nes It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced idle enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced idle callin action String Blank Description Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF BLF list DSS key if the monitor is ringing and monitored user is idle This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key Example b...

Page 569: ...om configuration when the monitored user is ringing 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the IP phone will display the custom BLF BLF List DSS key LED status icon colors and perform the custom behavior when pressing the BLF BLF List DSS key Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced callin led String Blank Description Configures the custom BL...

Page 570: ...is ringing This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key Example blf enhanced callin idle action newcall Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced callin enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced callin callin action String Blank Description Configures the...

Page 571: ...t to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced callout enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom configuration when the monitored user is calling out 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the IP phone will display the custom BLF BLF List DSS key LED status icon colors and perform the custom behavior when pressing the BLF BLF List DSS key Note It is not applicable to ...

Page 572: ...None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced callout idle action String Blank Description Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF BLF list DSS key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is calling out This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key Example blf enhanced callout idle action newcall Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only i...

Page 573: ...n Enhanced DSS key Example blf enhanced callout talking action newcall Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced callout enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced talking enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom configuration when the monitored user is talking 0 Disa...

Page 574: ...ays a green icon for 1000ms and then the icon color turns to white Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced talking enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced talking idle action String Blank Description Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF BLF list DSS key if the monitor is ...

Page 575: ...ank Description Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF BLF list DSS key if the monitor and monitored user are talking This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key Example blf enhanced talking talking action newcall Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced talking enable is set to 1 Enabled Web ...

Page 576: ... illuminates solid green for 1000ms and then goes out For SIP T48G T48S IP phones the BLF BLF List DSS key field displays a green icon for 1000ms and then the icon color turns to white Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced parked enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced parked id...

Page 577: ...T19 P E2 IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter blf enhanced parked enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None blf enhanced parked talking action String Blank Description Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF BLF list DSS key if the monitor is talking and a call is being parked against the monitored phone This value uses the same macro actio...

Page 578: ... Y type linekey X line expansion_module X key Y line linekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X pickup_value expansion_module X key Y pickup_value linekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Assign a BLF DSS key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dsskey q load model 0 Phone User Interface Assign a BLF DSS key Details of Configuration ...

Page 579: ... P E2 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 16 Line 16 Example linekey 2 line 1 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Line Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Account ID linekey X value 1 expansion_module X key Y value 2 String within 99 characters Description Co...

Page 580: ...Dsskey Line Key Extension Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Extension linekey X label 1 expansion_module X key Y label 2 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones We...

Page 581: ...d 4 Select the desired line from the pull down list of Line 5 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 6 Optional Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field 7 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a BLF DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to se...

Page 582: ...ion Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default features blf intercom_mode enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to initiate an outgoing intercom call with a monitored user when pressing the BLF DSS key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note To use this feature you also need to configure the intercom mode configured by the parameter features intercom mode It is not applicable to SIP T...

Page 583: ... phone show the status of monitored users The monitoring user can also be notified about calls being parked no longer parked against any monitored user IP phones support BLF list using a SUBSCRIBE NOTIFY mechanism as specified in RFC 3265 This feature depends on support from a SIP server You can customize BLF LED status when the supervisor s phone and the monitored phone are in different statuses ...

Page 584: ...ey X line expansion_module X key Y line Web User Interface Configure BLF List Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p accou nt adv q load acc 0 Assign a BLF List DSS key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dsske y q load model 0 Phone User Interface Assign a BLF List DSS key Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting auto_blf_list_enable 0 or 1 1 ...

Page 585: ...d page on Expansion2 Line Key second page Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting auto_blf_list_enable is set to 1 Enabled To assign Ext Key make sure the expansion module has been connected to the phone in advance It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X blf blf_list_uri 1...

Page 586: ...ed call pickup with barge in for a specific account Example account 1 blf_list_barge_in_code 33 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Account Advanced BLF List Barge In Code Phone User Interface None account X blf_list_retrieve_call_parked_code 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the feature access code for the call park retrieve for a specif...

Page 587: ...st DSS key on the IP phone Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X line 1 expansion_module X key Y line 2 Refer to the following content Description Configures the desired line to apply the...

Page 588: ... P E2 X 1 2 2 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure the BLF List settings via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the account for example account 1 from the pull down list of Account 3 Enter the BLF List URI in the BLF List URI field 4 Optional ...

Page 589: ... call park code will be replaced by the identifier Call Park when you park an active call The hide feature access codes feature is applicable to the following features Voice Mail Pick up Group Pick up Barge In not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Retrieve Call Park Call Pull not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Procedure The hide feature access codes feature can be configured using the fol...

Page 590: ...of the feature access code when dialing or in talk 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Hide Feature Access Codes Phone User Interface None To enable hide feature access codes feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Hide Feature Access Codes 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Automatic Call...

Page 591: ...navailable is configurable by the auto available timer When the timer expires the IP phone status is automatically changed to available ACD auto available timer feature depends on support from a SIP server You can configure an ACD DSS key for the user to log into the ACD system The ACD DSS key on the IP phone indicates the ACD status ACD DSS key is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Procedur...

Page 592: ...sabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X acd available 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display the Available Avail or Unavailable Unavail soft key for a specific account after the IP phone logs into the ACD system 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X acd enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Int...

Page 593: ...nt X acd enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features ACD ACD Auto Available Phone User Interface None acd auto_available_timer Integer from 0 to 120 60 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the status of the ACD agent to be automatically changed to available Note It works only if the values of parameters account X acd enable and acd enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Inte...

Page 594: ...er Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 expansion_module X key Y label 2 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Label ...

Page 595: ...1 Click on Dsskey Line Key 2 In the desired DSS key field select ACD from the pull down list of Type 3 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the ACD auto available timer feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features ACD 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of ACD Auto Available 3 Enter th...

Page 596: ...rmation on how to register accounts refer to Account Registration on page 192 If you want to customize multiple DSS keys to associate with an account refer to Multiple Line Keys per Account on page 199 If you want to configure multiple concurrent calls for each registered line refer to Multiple Call Appearances on page 206 Any IP phone can be used to originate or receive calls on the shared line A...

Page 597: ...e SCA can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure the registration line type Parameter account X shared_line Configure the call pull feature access code Parameter account X shared_line_callpull_code y0000000000xx cfg Configure the private hold soft key Parameters phone_setting custom_softkey_enable custom_softkey_talking url Assign a pri...

Page 598: ...dvanced Shared Line Phone User Interface None account X shared_line_callpull_code 1 String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the call pull feature access code to retrieve an existing call from another shared phone that is in active or public hold status for a specific account Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X shared_line is set to 1 Share Call Appearance It...

Page 599: ...out Custom Softkey Phone User Interface None custom_softkey_talking url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Talking state Example custom_softkey_talking url http 192 168 1 20 XMLfiles Talking xml During the auto provisioning process the IP phone connects to the provisioning server 192 168 ...

Page 600: ...n for each DSS key Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Label Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Label linekey X shortlabel X ranges from 1 to 21 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the short label displayed on the LC...

Page 601: ...key 21 cannot be configured To configure the shared line settings on the primary phone via web user interface 1 Register the primary account for example 4609 2 Click on Advanced select Shared Call Appearance from the pull down list of Shared Line 3 Click Confirm to accept the change ...

Page 602: ...e shared line settings on alternate phone via web user interface 1 Register the alternate account for example 4609_1 Enter the primary account 4609 in the Register Name field 2 Click on Advanced select Shared Call Appearance from the pull down list of Shared Line 3 Click Confirm to accept the change ...

Page 603: ...he call pull feature access code for example 11 in the Call Pull Feature Access Code field 4 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the private hold soft key via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Softkey Layout 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Custom Softkey 3 Select On Talk from the pull down list of Call States 4 Select PriHold from the Unselected Softkeys column and the...

Page 604: ...figure a private hold DSS key via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Private Hold from the Key Type field 4 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 5 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Bridge Lines Appearance BLA BL...

Page 605: ...vailable for all phones in the group to retrieve Procedure BLA can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure the registration line type Parameter account X shared_line Configure the BLA number Parameter account X bla_number Configure the period of BLA subscription Parameter account X bla_subscribe_period Web User Interface Configure the reg...

Page 606: ...set to 3 Draft BLA Web User Interface Account Advanced BLA Number Phone User Interface None account X bla_subscribe_period 1 Integer from 60 to 7200 300 Description Configures the period in seconds of the BLA subscription for a specific account Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X shared_line is set to 3 Draft BLA Web User Interface Account Advanced BLA Subscription Period Ph...

Page 607: ... an indicator message including a voice mail icon on the LCD screen the power indicator LED slowly flashes red and the MESSAGE key LED lights up MESSAGE key LED is only applicable to SIP T29G T27P T27G T23P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones For more information on power indicator LED refer to Power Indicator LED on page 133 IP phones support both solicited and unsolicited MWI Unsolicited MWI Unsolicited MWI...

Page 608: ...ice_mail number X Configure the presentation of audio and visual MWI Parameter account X display_mwi enable Web User Interface Configure subscribe for MWI Configure subscribe MWI to voice mail Configure the voice mail number on a per line basis Configure the presentation of audio and visual MWI Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p accou nt adv q load acc 0 Phone User Interface Configure the v...

Page 609: ...IBE for message summary events before expiration of the subscription dialog Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X subscribe_mwi is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced MWI Subscription Period Seconds Phone User Interface None account X subscribe_mwi_to_vm 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to subscribe the message waiting indicator to the v...

Page 610: ... MWI at the time of solicited MWI MWI subscription feature should be configured in advance It works only if the values of parameters features voice_mail_tone_enable features voice_mail_popup enable and phone_setting mail_power_led_flash_enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced Voice Mail Display Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S...

Page 611: ...ed account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Subscribe for MWI 4 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Subscribe MWI To Voice Mail 5 Enter the desired voice number in the Voice Mail field 6 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the presentation of audio and visual MWI via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select th...

Page 612: ...ature allows users to send and receive text messages using Yealink IP phones It depends on support from a SIP server You can send text messages by initiating a new dialogue or by replying to a received message By default this feature is enabled You will find the Text Message option on the IP phone user interface Menu Message where you can send text messages If this feature is disabled the Text Mes...

Page 613: ...d using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure SMS for the IP phone Parameter features text_message enable Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features text_message enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to send or receive text message s 0 Disabled the IP phone can neither send nor receive t...

Page 614: ...out involving SIP signaling by pressing a configured multicast paging DSS key or a paging list DSS key A multicast address IP Port and a channel 0 to 30 should be assigned to the multicast paging DSS key which is defined to transmit RTP stream to a group of designated IP phones on the desired channel When the IP phone sends the RTP stream to a pre configured multicast address belonging to a desire...

Page 615: ...r linekey X type programmable X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X label programmable X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Specify a multicast codec for the IP phone to send the RTP stream Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p feature s general q load Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list DSS key Configure the m...

Page 616: ...22 G722 Description Configures the codec of multicast paging Example multicast codec G722 Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones Web User Interface Features General Information Multicast Codec Phone User Interface None multicast paging_address X ip_address X ranges from 1 to 31 String Blank Description Configures the IP address and port number of the multicast paging group in the pagi...

Page 617: ...s X channel X ranges from 1 to 31 Integer from 0 to 30 0 Description Configures the channel of the multicast paging group in the paging list If it is set to 0 all the Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior or Yealink IP phones listens to channel 0 or third party available devices for example Cisco IP phones in the paging group can receive the RTP stream If it is set to 1 to 25 the ...

Page 618: ...y Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X value 1 programablekey X value 2 expansion_module X key Y value 3 String within 99 characters Description Configures the multicast IP address and port number Note The valid multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T2...

Page 619: ... Key Programable Key Label Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Label linekey X shortlabel X ranges from 1 to 21 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key Note It is only applicable to SIP T52S IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Short Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Short L...

Page 620: ...face Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Inte...

Page 621: ...1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure a codec for multicast paging via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired codec from the pull down list of Multicast Codec 3 Click Confirm to ...

Page 622: ...own list of Type 3 Enter the multicast IP address and port number in the Value field The valid multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 4 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 5 Enter the desired channel in the Extension field The valid channel ranges from 0 to 30 6 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure a paging list DSS key...

Page 623: ... Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Paging List from the Key Type field 5 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Receiving RTP Stream IP phones can receive an RTP stream f...

Page 624: ...the incoming multicast paging calls when there is already a multicast paging call in progress If it is disabled the IP phone will automatically ignore all incoming multicast paging calls If it is enabled an incoming multicast paging call with higher priority or equal is automatically answered and the one with lower priority is ignored Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the foll...

Page 625: ...D screen when receiving the multicast paging calls Example multicast listen_address 1 label Paging1 Web User Interface Directory Multicast IP Multicast Listening Label Phone User Interface None multicast listen_address X channel X ranges from 1 to 31 Integer from 0 to 30 0 Description Configures the channel that the IP phone listens to If it is set to 0 the IP phone can receive an RTP stream of th...

Page 626: ...ume of the speaker can be adjusted by pressing the Volume key in advance when the phone is during a call You can also adjust the volume of the speaker during the paging call If it is set to 1 to 15 the configured volume takes effect and the current volume of the speaker will be ignored You are not allowed to adjust the volume of the speaker during the paging call Example multicast listen_address 1...

Page 627: ...ty Active Phone User Interface None multicast receive_priority priority Integer from 0 to 31 31 Description Configures the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when there is a voice call a normal phone call rather than a multicast paging call in progress 1 is the highest priority 31 is the lowest priority 0 Disabled all incoming multicast paging calls will be automatic...

Page 628: ... a lower priority than this value when DND is activated in phone mode Web User Interface Directory Multicast IP Ignore DND Phone User Interface None To configure multicast listening addresses via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Multicast IP 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Paging Barge 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Ignore DND 4 Select the desire...

Page 629: ...nd URL record Record is for the IP phone to send the server a SIP INFO message containing a specific header URL record is for the IP phone to send the server an HTTP GET message containing a specific URL The server processes these messages and decides to start or stop a recording Note Record When a user presses a record DSS key during a call the IP phone sends a SIP INFO message to the server with...

Page 630: ...20 Record off Content Length 0 URL Record When a user presses a URL record DSS key during a call the IP phone sends an HTTP GET message to the server Example of an HTTP GET message GET URLRecord record xml HTTP 1 1 r n Request Method GET Request URI URLRecord record xml Request version HTTP 1 1 Host 10 3 5 97 8080 r n User Agent Yealink SIP T46G 28 82 0 20 00 15 65 74 B1 50 r n If the recording is...

Page 631: ...ext Procedure Record or URL record DSS key can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Assign a record DSS key Parameters linekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Assign a URL record DSS key Parameters linekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X value expan...

Page 632: ...ly applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Type linekey X label 1 expansion_module X key Y label 2 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT ke...

Page 633: ...onfigured URL Record DSS Key Parameters Permitted Values linekey X type 1 expansion_module X key Y type 2 35 Description Configures a DSS key as a URL record DSS key on the IP phone Note It is not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DS...

Page 634: ...abel X ranges from 1 to 21 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key Note It is only applicable to SIP T52S IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Short Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Short Label 1 X is the line key ID For SIP T48G S X 1 29 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X 1 27 for SIP T42G T42S T...

Page 635: ...e user interface 1 Press Menu Features DSS Keys 2 Select the desired DSS key 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select Record from the Key Type field 5 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change To configure a URL record DSS key via phone u...

Page 636: ... then register his account on line 1 To use this feature you need to assign a hot desking DSS key Procedure Hot Desking feature can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx c fg Configure the hot desking logon wizard Parameters hotdesking dsskey_register_name_enable hotdesking dsskey_username_enable hotdesking dsskey_password_enable hotdesking...

Page 637: ...one hotdesking dsskey_username_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of user name on the hot desking logon wizard when pressing the Hot Desking DSS key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the original user name information will be cleared Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None hotdesking dsskey_password_enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the I...

Page 638: ...er Interface None hotdesking dsskey_outbound_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the hot desking logon wizard when pressing the Hot Desking DSS key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled the original outbound server information will be cleared Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Hot Desking DSS Key For more information on how to con...

Page 639: ...e Key X Label linekey X shortlabel X ranges from 1 to 21 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key Note It is only applicable to SIP T52S IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Short Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Short Label 1 X is the line key ID For SIP T48G S X 1 29 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T...

Page 640: ... Press or or the Switch soft key to select Hot Desking from the Key Type field 5 Optional Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field 6 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Logon Wizard Logon wizard allows IP phones to provide the logon wizard during the first startup Note Procedure Logon wizard can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning C...

Page 641: ...res General Information Logon Wizard Phone User Interface None hotdesking startup_register_name_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of register name on the logon wizard after startup when there is no registered account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting logon_wizard is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interfa...

Page 642: ...word on the logon wizard after startup when there is no registered account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting logon_wizard is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None hotdesking startup_sip_server_enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of SIP server on the logon wizard after star...

Page 643: ...rd after startup when there is no registered account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting logon_wizard is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure logon wizard feature via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Logon Wizard 3 Click Confirm ...

Page 644: ...on hook Incoming Call When the IP phone receives an incoming call Outgoing Call When the IP phone places a call Established When the IP phone establishes a call Terminated When the IP phone terminates a call Open DND When the IP phone enables the DND mode Close DND When the IP phone disables the DND mode Open Always Forward When the IP phone enables the always forward Close Always Forward When the...

Page 645: ... via power on Open Call Waiting When the IP phone enables the call waiting Close Call Waiting When the IP phone disables the call waiting Headset When the IP phone presses the HEADSET key Handfree When the IP phone presses the Speakerphone key Cancel Call Out When the IP phone cancels an outgoing call in the ring back state Remote Busy When an outgoing call is rejected Call Remote Canceled When th...

Page 646: ...the IP phone places a call receives an incoming call or establishes a call local The SIP URI of the caller when the IP phone places a call The SIP URI of the callee when the IP phone receives an incoming call remote The SIP URI of the callee when the IP phone places a call The SIP URI of the caller when the IP phone receives an incoming call display_local The display name of the caller when the IP...

Page 647: ...ing_call action_url call_established action_url dnd_on action_url dnd_off action_url always_fwd_on action_url always_fwd_off action_url busy_fwd_on action_url busy_fwd_off action_url no_answer_fwd_on action_url no_answer_fwd_off action_url transfer_call action_url blind_transfer_call action_url attended_transfer_call action_url hold action_url unhold action_url held action_url unheld action_url mu...

Page 648: ...e action URL Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p f eatures actionurl q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url setup_completed 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after startup Example action_url setup_completed http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Setup C...

Page 649: ...atures Action URL Unregistered Phone User Interface None action_url register_failed 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after a register failed Example action_url register_failed http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Register Failed Phone User Interface None action_url off_hook 1 URL within 511 characters Blan...

Page 650: ...Interface None action_url incoming_call 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when receiving an incoming call Example action_url incoming_call http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Incoming Call Phone User Interface None action_url outgoing_call 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action...

Page 651: ... within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when DND feature is activated Example action_url dnd_on http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Open DND Phone User Interface None action_url dnd_off 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when DND feature is deactivated Example a...

Page 652: ...P phone sends when always forward feature is deactivated Example action_url always_fwd_off http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Close Always Forward Phone User Interface None action_url busy_fwd_on 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when busy forward feature is activated Example action_url busy_fwd_on http 1...

Page 653: ...ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Open NoAnswer Forward Phone User Interface None action_url no_answer_fwd_off 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when no answer forward feature is deactivated Example action_url no_answer_fwd_off http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Close NoAnswer Forward Phone User I...

Page 654: ...ion URL Blind Transfer Phone User Interface None action_url attended_transfer_call 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when performing an attended semi attended transfer Example action_url attended_transfer_call http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Attended Transfer Phone User Interface None action_url hold 1...

Page 655: ...e None action_url held 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when a call is held Example action_url held http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None action_url unheld 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when a held call is resumed Example action_url unh...

Page 656: ...tion URL the IP phone sends when un muting a call Example action_url unmute http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL UnMute Phone User Interface None action_url missed_call 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when missing a call Example action_url missed_call http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Fe...

Page 657: ...sy_to_idle http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Busy To Idle Phone User Interface None action_url idle_to_busy 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when changing the state of the IP phone from idle to busy Example action_url idle_to_busy http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL I...

Page 658: ... 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Forward Incoming Call Phone User Interface None action_url reject_incoming_call 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when rejecting an incoming call Example action_url reject_incoming_call http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Reject Incoming Call Phon...

Page 659: ... Features Action URL Transfer Finished Phone User Interface None action_url transfer_failed 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when failing to transfer a call Example action_url transfer_failed http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Transfer Failed Phone User Interface None action_url setup_autop_finish 1 URL ...

Page 660: ...Interface Features Action URL Open Call Waiting Phone User Interface None action_url call_waiting_off 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when call waiting feature is disabled Example action_url call_waiting_off http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Close Call Waiting Phone User Interface None action_url heads...

Page 661: ...ancel_callout 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when cancels the outgoing call in the ring back state Example action_url cancel_callout http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Cancel Call Out Phone User Interface None action_url remote_busy 1 URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the action UR...

Page 662: ...canceled http 192 168 0 20 help xml IP ip Web User Interface Features Action URL Call Remote Canceled Phone User Interface None 1 The value format is http s IP address of server help xml variable name variable value And the valid variable values are mac ip model firmware active_url active_user active_host local remote display_local display_remote call_id callerID and calledNumber To configure acti...

Page 663: ...This method is especially useful for users who always working in the small office home office where a secure firewall may prevent the HTTP or HTTPS GET request from the external network Note Example of a SIP Notify with the variable value OK Message Header NOTIFY sip 3583 10 2 40 10 5062 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 2 40 27 5063 branch z9hG4bK4163876675 From sip 3586 10 2 1 48 tag 2900480538 To 3583...

Page 664: ...call F_HOLD HOLD Place an active call on hold F_CONFERENCE Press the Conf Conference soft key Cancel CANCEL Cancel actions or reject incoming calls or end a call X Cancel actions or reject incoming calls or mute or un mute calls 0 9 POUND Press the keypad 0 9 or L1 LX Press the line keys for SIP T48G S X 29 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X 27 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X 15 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X ...

Page 665: ...006 10 2 1 48 means the SIP URL you dial from OFFHOOK Pick up the handset ONHOOK Hang up the handset ANSWER ASW Asw Answer a call Reset Reset a phone ATrans xxx Perform a semi attended attended transfer to xxx BTrans xxx Perform a blind transfer to xxx phonecfg get accounts x dnd x fw x Get firmware version registration DND or forward configuration information The valid value of x is 0 or 1 0 mean...

Page 666: ...d feature for the IP phone Note For Yealink IP phones it works only if the value of the parameter features fwd allow is set to 1 Enabled and call forward mode is Phone the always busy no answer forward feature will apply to all the accounts on the phone Example http 10 10 20 10 servlet key NoAnswFwdOff CALLEND CallEnd End a call ASW CANCEL HOLD UNHOLD xxx Answer end hold unhold a call xxx refers t...

Page 667: ... control You can specify one or more trusted IP addresses on the IP phone or configure the IP phone to receive and handle the URI from any IP address If you are using SIP NOTIFY message method you do not need to specify the trusted IP address for action URI But you should enable the IP phone to receive the action URI requests When the IP phone receives a SIP NOTIFY message with the Event ACTION UR...

Page 668: ...Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features show_action_uri_option 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to pop up the Allow Remote Control prompt 0 Disabled the phone will not pop up the Allow Remote Control prompt when receiving an HTTP or HTTPS GET request or receiving a SIP NOTIFY message with the Event ACTION URI header The phone will directly pe...

Page 669: ...P GET requests from any IP address Example features action_uri_limit_ip 10 3 6 117 10 3 6 119 Note It works only if the value of the parameter features action_uri enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features Remote Control Action URI Allow IP List Phone User Interface None To configure the trusted IP address es for action URI via web user interface 1 Click on Features Remote Control 2 En...

Page 670: ...r more information on the trusted IP address refer to Configuring Trusted IP Address for Action URI on page 645 When you capture the screen display the IP phone may prompt you to enter the user name and password of the administrator if web browser does not remember the user name and password for web user interface login Note To capture the current screen of the phone 1 Enter request URI for exampl...

Page 671: ...puter is included in the trusted IP address for Action URI on the phone For more information on the trusted IP address refer to Configuring Trusted IP Address for Action URI on page 645 If you place a call via web user interface but the trusted IP address has not been configured the web user interface prompts Call fail To place a call via web user interface 1 Click on Directory Phone Call Info 2 S...

Page 672: ...nality is preserved by having a second equivalent capability call server take over from the one that has gone down off line This mode of operation should be done using the DNS mechanism from the primary to the secondary server Therefore if you want to use this mode the server must be configured with a domain name Fallback In this mode a second less featured call server with SIP capability takes ov...

Page 673: ...ry server for example 192 168 1 13 has the highest priority server in a cluster of servers resolved by the DNS server The secondary server for example 192 168 1 14 backs up a primary server when the primary server fails and offers the same functionality as the primary server Fallback Server Server 2 is configured with the IP address of the fallback server For example 192 168 1 15 A fallback server...

Page 674: ...as many times as configured until the registration is successful When the primary server registration is unavailable the secondary server will serve as the working server As soon as the primary server registration succeeds it returns to being the working server Registration methods of the fallback mode include not applicable to outbound proxy servers Concurrent registration default The IP phone re...

Page 675: ..._signal_with_registered account X sip_server Y invite_retry_counts account X sip_server Y failback_mode account X sip_server Y failback_timeout account X sip_server Y failback_subscribe enable Failover Mode for outbound proxy server Parameters account X outbound_proxy Y register_on_enable account X outbound_proxy Y only_signal_with_regi stered account X outbound_proxy Y invite_retry_counts account...

Page 676: ...Y account X sip_server Y port 1 Y ranges from 1 to 2 Integer from 0 to 65535 5060 Description Configures the port of the SIP server Y that specifies registrations for a specific account Example account 1 sip_server 1 port 5060 Note If the value of this parameter is set to 0 the port used depends on the value specified by the parameter account X sip_server Y transport_type Web User Interface Accoun...

Page 677: ... Y ranges from 1 to 2 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to register to the secondary server before sending requests to it for a specific account when encountering a failover 0 Disabled the IP phone won t attempt to register to the secondary server since the phone assumes that the primary and secondary servers share registration information So the IP phone will directly send the...

Page 678: ...ts to the next available server for a specific account when encountering a failover Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X outbound_proxy_enable 1 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to send requests to the outbound proxy server for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Register Enable Outbound Proxy Server Phone User Interface Me...

Page 679: ...one account X outbound_proxy Y retry_counts 1 Y ranges from 1 to 2 Integer from 0 to 20 1 Description Configures the retry times for the IP phone to resend requests when the outbound proxy server Y is unavailable or there is no response from the outbound proxy server Y for a specific account If it is set to 1 the IP phone will invoke the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y retry_counts t...

Page 680: ...utbound_proxy Y only_signal_with_registered 1 Y ranges from 1 to 2 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to only send requests to the registered outbound proxy server for a specific account when encountering a failover 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If it is set to 1 the IP phone will invoke the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y retry_counts to take effect Note It works only if t...

Page 681: ...iption Configures the time interval in seconds for the IP phone to detect whether the working server is available by sending the registration request for a specific account after the fallback server takes over call control Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X fallback redundancy_type is set to 1 Successive Registration It is not applicable to outbound proxy servers Web User I...

Page 682: ...he DNS A records on the registered server expires the phone will retry to send requests to the primary server 2 Registration the IP phone will send requests to the last registered server first If the registration expires the phone will retry to send requests to the primary server 3 duration the IP phone will send requests to the last registered server first If the time defined by the parameter acc...

Page 683: ...A Note It works only if the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y failback_mode is set to 1 2 or 3 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X outbound_proxy Y failback_mode 1 Y ranges from 1 to 2 0 1 2 or 3 1 Description Configures the failback mode for the IP phone to retry the primary outbound proxy server in failover for a specific account If it is set to 1 the IP phone...

Page 684: ...iption Configures the timeout in seconds for the phone to retry to send requests to the primary outbound proxy server after failing over to the current working server for a specific account If it is set to 1 the IP phone will invoke the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y failback_timeout to take effect If you set the parameter to 0 the IP phone will not send requests to the primary outb...

Page 685: ...1 2 or 3 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure server redundancy for fallback purpose via web user interface 1 Click on Account Register 2 Select the desired account ...

Page 686: ...rver 2 in the corresponding fields 6 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure server redundancy for failover purpose via web user interface 1 Click on Account Register 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Configure registration parameters of the selected account in the corresponding fields 4 Configure parameters of the SIP server 1 or SIP server 2 in the corresp...

Page 687: ...oxy server 1 2 in the corresponding fields You must set the port of outbound proxy server to 0 for NAPTR SRV and A queries 7 Click Confirm to accept the change Server Domain Name Resolution If a domain name is configured for a server the IP address es associated with that domain name will be resolved through DNS as specified by RFC 3263 The DNS query involves NAPTR SRV and A queries which allows t...

Page 688: ...gexp replacement IN NAPTR 90 50 s SIP D2T _sip _tcp yealink pbx com IN NAPTR 100 50 s SIP D2U _sip _udp yealink pbx com Parameters are explained in the following table Parameter Description order Specify preferential treatment for the specific record The order is from lowest to highest lower order is more preferred pref Specify the preference for processing multiple NAPTR records with the same ord...

Page 689: ... to different hosts and have the same priority 0 The weight of the second record is higher than the first one so the second record will be picked first The two records also contain a port 5060 the IP phone uses this port If the Target is not a numeric IP address the IP phone performs an A query So in this case the IP phone uses server1 yealink pbx com and server2 yealink pbx com for the A query A ...

Page 690: ...and the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y port is set to 0 the IP phone will perform the DNS NAPTR and SRV queries for the transport protocol ports and servers If the value of this parameter is set to 3 DNS NAPTR the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y address is set to an IP address and the value of the parameter account X sip_server Y port is set to an explicit port except ...

Page 691: ...DNS query to resolve the domain name from the DNS server If the DNS query returns no results for the domain name or the returned record cannot be contacted the values in the static DNS cache if configured are used when their configured time intervals are not elapsed If the configured time interval is elapsed the IP phone will attempt to perform a DNS query again If the DNS query returns a result t...

Page 692: ...tl dns_cache_srv X name dns_cache_srv X port dns_cache_srv X priority dns_cache_srv X target dns_cache_srv X weight dns_cache_srv X ttl dns_cache_a X name dns_cache_a X ip dns_cache_a X ttl MAC cfg Configure the IP phone whether to cache the additional DNS records Parameter account X dns_cache_type Configure the IP phone whether to use static DNS cache preferentially Parameter account X static_cac...

Page 693: ...90 has the higher priority than that with the order 100 because 90 is lower than 100 Example dns_cache_naptr 1 order 90 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dns_cache_naptr X preference X ranges from 1 to 12 Integer from 0 to 65535 0 Description Configures the preference of NAPTR record X NAPTR record with lower value is more preferred when the multiple NAPTR records have the same ord...

Page 694: ...escription Configures the transport protocol available for the SIP server in NAPTR record X SIP D2U SIP over UDP SIP D2T SIP over TCP SIP D2S SIP over SCTP SIPS D2T SIPS over TCP Example dns_cache_naptr 1 service SIP D2T Note For more information refer to RFC 2915 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dns_cache_naptr X ttl X ranges from 1 to 12 Integer from 30 to 2147483647 300 Descrip...

Page 695: ...Description Configures the port to be used in SRV record X Example dns_cache_srv 1 port 5060 Note For more information refer to RFC 2782 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dns_cache_srv X priority X ranges from 1 to 12 Integer from 0 to 65535 0 Description Configures the priority for the target host in SRV record X Lower priority is more preferred For example SRV record with the pri...

Page 696: ..._cache_srv X weight X ranges from 1 to 12 Integer from 0 to 65535 0 Description Configures the weight of the target host in SRV record X When priorities are equal weight is used to differentiate the preference Higher weight value is more preferred Example dns_cache_srv 1 weight 1 Note For more information refer to RFC 2782 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dns_cache_srv X ttl X ran...

Page 697: ...nterface None dns_cache_a X ip X ranges from 1 to 12 IP address Blank Description Configures the IP address that the domain name in A record X maps to Example dns_cache_a 1 ip 192 168 1 13 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None dns_cache_a X ttl X ranges from 1 to 12 Integer from 30 to 2147483647 300 Description Configures the time interval in seconds that A record X may be cached befor...

Page 698: ...e the additional DNS records Example account 1 dns_cache_type 1 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None account X static_cache_pri 1 0 or 1 0 Description Configures whether preferentially to use the static DNS cache for domain name resolution of the SIP server for a specific account 0 Use domain name resolution from the DNS server preferentially 1 Use static DNS cache preferentially Exam...

Page 699: ...xample the default RTP min port on the IP phones is 11780 The first voice session sends RTP on port 11780 Additional calls would then use ports 11782 11784 11786 and so on up to the max port Procedure RTP ports can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure RTP ports Parameters static network port max_rtpport static network port mi...

Page 700: ... min_rtpport If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced Local RTP Port Max RTP Port 1024 65535 Phone User Interface None To configure the minimum and maximum RTP port via web user interface 1 Click on Network Advanced 2 In the Local RTP Port block enter the max and min RTP port in the Max RTP Port 1024 65535 and Min RTP ...

Page 701: ...stics The following table provides a description of RPC methods supported by IP phones RPC Method Description GetRPCMethods This method is used to discover the set of methods supported by the CPE SetParameterValues This method is used to modify the value of one or more CPE parameters GetParameterValues This method is used to obtain the value of one or more CPE parameters GetParameterNames This met...

Page 702: ...nce of an object defined on the CPE DeleteObject This method is used to remove a particular instance of an object For more information on TR 069 refer to Yealink TR 069 Technote Procedure TR 069 can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuratio n File y000000000 0xx cfg Configure TR 069 feature Parameters static managementserver enable static managementserver username...

Page 703: ... Blank Description Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate with the ACS Auto Configuration Servers Leave it blank if no authentication is required Example static managementserver username tr69 Web User Interface Settings TR069 ACS Username Phone User Interface None static managementserver password String within 64 characters Blank Description Configures the password for the IP ph...

Page 704: ...R069 ACS URL Phone User Interface None static managementserver connection_request_username String within 128 characters Blank Description Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate the incoming connection requests of the ACS Auto Configuration Servers Example static managementserver connection_request_username accuser Web User Interface Settings TR069 Connection Request Username Pho...

Page 705: ...face Settings TR069 Enable Periodic Inform Phone User Interface None static managementserver periodic_inform_interval Integer from 5 to 429496729 5 60 Description Configures the interval in seconds for the IP phone to report its configuration to the ACS Auto Configuration Servers Note It works only if the value of the parameter static managementserver periodic_inform_enable is set to 1 Enabled Web...

Page 706: ...interface 1 Click on Settings TR069 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Enable TR069 3 Enter the user name and password authenticated by the ACS in the ACS Username and ACS Password fields 4 Enter the URL of the ACS in the ACS URL field 5 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Enable Periodic Inform 6 Enter the desired time in the Periodic Inform Interval seconds field 7 Enter...

Page 707: ... be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Assign an XML browser DSS key Parameters linekey X type programablekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X value programablekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Assign an X...

Page 708: ...es the available access URL to browser the XML object Example linekey 2 value http 10 2 1 158 TextMenu xml Note EXT key is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Value Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Key X Value linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 Strin...

Page 709: ...41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure an XML Browser DSS key via web user interface 1 Click on Dsskey Line Key or Programable Key 2 In the desired DSS key field select XM...

Page 710: ...with the macro language For more information refer to Understanding Macro Action Strings on page 688 For more information on Enhanced DSS Keys refer to Using Enhanced DSS Keys on Yealink IP Phones Some Guidelines for Configuring Enhanced DSS Keys The following guidelines will help you to configure EDK efficiently Activation of EDK functions requires valid macro construction character delimits the ...

Page 711: ...n with a letter If the macro name is not defined the execution of the action string will be ignored Example MAA means invoking the EDK macro AA S softkey ID The functionality of performing this action is the same as that of pressing the desired soft key Each soft key has a unique identifier on the IP phone you can configure this parameter according to the system defined softkey ID If the softkey I...

Page 712: ...or SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X 1 27 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X 1 15 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X 1 21 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 SoftKeyX X ranges from 1 to 4 ArrowUp ArrowDown ArrowLeft ArrowRight VolDown VolUp Cancel OK DialPadX X ranges from 0 to 9 DialPadPound DialPadStar Headset Mute Message Hold Redial Transfer Speaker Conference ExtX Y X stands for the serial numb...

Page 713: ... configure this parameter according to the system defined menu item ID If the menu item ID is not defined on the phone or there is no matched menu item on the current screen the execution of the action string will be ignored The menu item ID is case insensitive Example Istatus_list means entering the Status menu Note To view the menu item ID you can configure the value of the parameter edk id_mode...

Page 714: ...for the entire operation The value can be any string including the null string in this case no label displays This label is used if no label is configured for a custom key DSS key or soft key otherwise this one is ignored Make this the first entry in the action string Example LEDK2 1234 Tinvite defines calling out the number 1234 and using the label EDK2 for a Custom Key DSS key or soft key LED co...

Page 715: ...ently displaying the last color until triggered by other macros This macro can be only used for BLF BLF list feature For more information refer to Configuring BLF LED Status and BLF DSS Key Behavior on page 543 Configuring EDK Feature To configure EDK list EDK prompt EDK soft keys and custom DSS keys you have to enable EDK feature By default the EDK feature is disabled Yealink IP phones support di...

Page 716: ...itted Values Default features enhanced_dss_keys enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the Enhanced DSS Keys EDK feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None edk id_mode enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables to view the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key for three seconds at any interface 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The ...

Page 717: ...k edklist X mname edk edklist X action Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default edk edklist X enable X ranges from 1 to 255 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables Enhanced DSS Keys EDK macro X 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter features enhanced_dss_keys enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None ...

Page 718: ... 1 to 255 String Blank Description Configures the action string that contains a macro definition of the action that the softkey or DSS key performs If EDK is enabled this parameter must have a value Example edk edklist 2 action 1013 Tinvite Note It works only if the value of the parameter features enhanced_dss_keys enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None Config...

Page 719: ... works only if the value of the parameter features enhanced_dss_keys enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None edk edkprompt X label X ranges from 1 to 10 String Blank Description Configures the title of the input box which is displayed on the Enhanced DSS Keys EDK prompt X If it is left blank no prompt displays Example edk edkprompt 1 label Enter Password Note I...

Page 720: ...one edk edkprompt X userfeedback X ranges from 1 to 10 visible or masked visible Description Configures whether to hide the entered text for Enhanced DSS Keys EDK prompt X If it is set to visible the entered text is visible If it is set to masked the entered text displays as asterisk characters It can be used to mask password fields Example edk edkprompt 1 userfeedback masked Note It works only if...

Page 721: ...l on the phone And the phone is in the ringback state Transfer ring back There is a call being transferred to another phone And the phone is in the ringback state Hold The call is placed on hold on the phone Held The call is held Conference The phone sets up a conference call Dial tone There is a dial tone you can hear on the phone Dialing The phone is on the dialing screen Configuring the custom ...

Page 722: ...s from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter features enhanced_dss_keys enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X label X ranges from 1 to 10 String Blank Description Configures the text displayed on the soft key label Example softkey 1 label IVR1 Note...

Page 723: ...ey 1 position 3 Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X action X ranges from 1 to 10 String Blank Description Configures the action or function for custom soft key X This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key You can also...

Page 724: ...d a prefix for example custom_macro1 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X use idle X ranges from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the idle state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Pho...

Page 725: ...able are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X use transfer_connecting X ranges from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the transfer connecting state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User...

Page 726: ...e call failed state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X use ring_back X ranges from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the ring back state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works...

Page 727: ...ption Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the hold state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X use held X ranges from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed ...

Page 728: ...ftkey X use dialtone X ranges from 1 to 10 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the dial tone no numbers entered state 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the values of the parameters features enhanced_dss_keys enable and softkey X enable are set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None softkey X use dialing X ranges from 1 ...

Page 729: ... DSS key Parameters linekey X type programablekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X value programablekey X value expansion_module X key Y value linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Assign a custom key DSS key Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p dss key q load model 0 Phone User Interface Assign a custom key...

Page 730: ...tion for the DSS key This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS Key You can also invoke the EDK macro The macro name follows the character Example linekey 2 value macro2 In this example macro1 stands for the macro name configured by the parameter edk edklist X mname Note To configure a Custom Key DSS key make sure the value of the parameter features enhanced_dss_keys en...

Page 731: ... line key ID For SIP T48G S X 1 29 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X 1 27 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X 1 15 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X 1 21 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 2 X is the programable key ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the...

Page 732: ... y000000000028 cfg file or MAC cfg for example 001565770984 cfg file you want the IP phone to download features enhanced_dss_keys enable 1 edk edklist 1 enable 1 edk edklist 1 mname IVR1 edk edklist 1 action 1013 Tinvite Cwc Cp10 Penter number C4 N Tdtmf Cp3 Chu The macro IVR1 can be invoked by DSS keys or soft keys Once triggered the action string 1013 Tinvite Cwc Cp10 Penter number C4 N Tdtmf Cp...

Page 733: ...follows 1 A prompt appears on the LCD screen 2 Enter a number for up to 4 digits For example 1234 Press the OK soft key to continue 3 The IP phone places a call to 1013 using the default account and then waits for connection 4 After connection there is a 10 second pause and then the entered number 1234 is using DTMF dialing on the active call 5 After sending DTMF digits there is a 3 second pause a...

Page 734: ...Administrator s Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 712 ...

Page 735: ...lume Ringer Volume Audio Codecs Acoustic Clarity Technology DTMF Voice Quality Monitoring VQM Redial Tone Redial tone allows IP phones to continue to play the dial tone after inputting the preset numbers on the dialing screen Procedure Redial tone can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure redial tone feature Parameter features...

Page 736: ...lay the dial tone after inputting 123 on the dialing screen Web User Interface Features Audio Redial Tone Phone User Interface None To configure redial tone via web user interface 1 Click on Features Audio 2 Enter the desired value in the Redial Tone field 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Ring Tones Ring tones are used to indicate incoming calls acoustically Users can select a built in system ...

Page 737: ...gured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files y0000000000xx c fg Configure a ring tone for the IP phone Parameter phone_setting ring_type Specify the access URL of the custom ring tone Parameter ringtone url Delete all custom ring tone files Parameter ringtone delete MAC cfg Configure a ring tone for the SIP account Parameter account X ringtone ring_type Web User Inter...

Page 738: ... Splash wav or custom ring tone name for example Customring wav Example phone_setting ring_type Ring1 wav Web User Interface Settings Preference Ring Type Phone User Interface Menu Basic Sound Ring Tones Common account X ringtone ring_type 1 Refer to the following content Common Description Configures a ring tone for a specific account Permitted Values Common Ring1 wav Ring2 wav Ring3 wav Ring4 wa...

Page 739: ...ne ringtone delete http localhost all Blank Description Delete all custom ring tone files Example ringtone delete http localhost all Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To uploa...

Page 740: ...ng tone for the phone via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Preference 2 Select the desired ring tone from the pull down list of Ring Type 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To change the ring tone for the account via web user interface 1 Click on Account Basic 2 Select the desire account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired ring tone from the pull down list of Ring Type ...

Page 741: ...g tone If Common is selected this account will use the ring tone selected for the phone 4 Press the Save soft key to accept the change Distinctive Ring Tones Distinctive ring tones allows certain incoming calls to trigger IP phones to play distinctive ring tones The IP phone inspects the INVITE request for an Alert Info header when receiving an incoming call If the INVITE request contains an Alert...

Page 742: ... the corresponding ring tone Value of N Ring Tone features alert_info_tone 1 Ring Tone features alert_info_tone 0 1 Bellcore dr1 Ring1 wav 2 Bellcore dr2 Ring2 wav 3 Bellcore dr3 Ring3 wav 4 Bellcore dr4 Ring4 wav 5 Bellcore dr5 Ring5 wav 6 Ring6 wav 7 Ring7 wav 8 Ring8 wav 9 Silent wav 10 Splash wav N 1 or N 10 Ring1 wav Examples Alert Info http 127 0 0 1 Bellcore dr1 Alert Info test Bellcore dr1...

Page 743: ...200 525 Ringing Long 630 800 1025 Silent 2975 4000 4400 Bellcore dr4 4 Ringing Short 200 300 525 Silent 145 200 525 Ringing Long 800 1000 1100 Silent 145 200 525 Ringing Short 200 300 525 Silent 2975 4000 4400 Bellcore dr5 5 Ringing 450 500 550 Note 2 Alert Info ringtone N or Alert Info MyMelodyN When the Alter Info header contains the keyword ringtone N or MyMolodyN the IP phone will play the cor...

Page 744: ... the WAV ring tone file from the URL and then play the remote ring tone if the value of the parameter account X alert_info_url_enable is set to 1 or the item called Distinctive Ring Tones on the web user interface is Enabled or play the preconfigured local ring tone in about 10 seconds if the value of the parameter account X alert_info_url_enable is set to 0 or if the IP phone fails to download th...

Page 745: ...the phone plays a warning tone to alert the user before answering the incoming call For more information on enable auto answer tone refer to Auto Answer on page 345 Note Procedure Distinctive ring tones can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration Files MAC cfg Configure distinctive ring tones Parameter account X alert_info_url_enable y0000000000x x cfg Configur...

Page 746: ... Alert Info header for a specific account 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Account Advanced Distinctive Ring Tones Phone User Interface None features alert_info_tone 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to map the keywords in the Alert info header to the specified Bellcore ring tones 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None distinctive_ring_ton...

Page 747: ...te ring tone 1 Ring1 wav 2 Ring2 wav 3 Ring3 wav 4 Ring4 wav 5 Ring5 wav 6 Ring6 wav 7 Ring7 wav 8 Ring8 wav 9 Silent wav 10 Splash wav Web User Interface Settings Ring Internal Ringer File Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X ...

Page 748: ...nal ringer file via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Ring 2 Enter the keywords in the Internal Ringer Text fields 3 Select the desired ring tones for each text from the pull down lists of Internal Ringer File 4 Click Confirm to accept the change Tones When receiving a message the IP phone will play a warning tone You can customize tones or select specialized tone sets vary from country to co...

Page 749: ...eat Britain Greece Hungary Lithuania India Italy Japan Mexico New Zealand Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Switzerland Sweden Russia United States Chile Czech ETSI Configured tones can be heard on IP phones for the following conditions Condition Description Dial When in the dialing interface Secondary Dial When adding a comma to the digit map For more information on digit map refer to Dial Plan u...

Page 750: ... Tone Message When receiving a text message For more information on text message refer to Short Message Service SMS Auto Answer When automatically answering a call For more information on auto answer refer to Auto Answer Procedure Tones can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the tones for the IP phone Parameters voice tone ...

Page 751: ...ne User Interface None voice tone dial String Blank Description Customizes the dial tone tonelist element element element Where element Freq1 Freq2 Freq3 Freq4 Duration Freq the frequency of the tone ranges from 200 to 4000Hz If it is set to 0Hz it means the tone is not played For SIP T40P T40G T27G T23P T23G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 A tone is comprised of at most two different frequencies For SIP T54S T...

Page 752: ...lue format refer to the parameter voice tone dial Note It works only if the value of the parameter voice tone country is set to Custom If you want to disable this warning tone set it to 0 Web User Interface Settings Tones Secondary Dial Phone User Interface None voice tone ring String Blank Description Customizes the ringback tone The value format is Freq Duration For more information on the value...

Page 753: ...re information on the value format refer to the parameter voice tone dial Note It works only if the value of the parameter voice tone country is set to Custom If you want to disable this warning tone set it to 0 Web User Interface Settings Tones Congestion Phone User Interface None voice tone callwaiting String Blank Description Customizes the call waiting tone The value format is Freq Duration Fo...

Page 754: ...ormation for example the number you are calling is not in service The value format is Freq Duration For more information on the value format refer to the parameter voice tone dial Note It works only if the value of the parameter voice tone country is set to Custom If you want to disable this warning tone set it to 0 Web User Interface Settings Tones Info Phone User Interface None voice tone stutte...

Page 755: ...o 0 Web User Interface Settings Tones Message Phone User Interface None voice tone autoanswer String Blank Description Customizes the warning tone for auto answer The value format is Freq Duration For more information on the value format refer to the parameter voice tone dial Note It works only if the value of the parameter voice tone country is set to Custom If you want to disable this warning to...

Page 756: ...ry for your IP phone For more information refer to Tones on page 726 Procedure Voice mail tone can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure whether to play a warning tone when the IP phone receives a new voice mail Parameter features voice_mail_tone_enable Web User Interface Configure whether to play a warning tone when the IP ph...

Page 757: ...on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Voice Mail Tone 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Ringer Device for Headset The IP phones support either or both speaker and headset ringer devices Ringer Device for Headset feature allows users to configure which ringer device to be used when receiving an incoming call For example if the ringer device is set ...

Page 758: ...Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p fe atures audio q load Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features ringer_device is_use_headset 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the ringer device for the IP phone 0 Use Speaker 1 Use Headset 2 Use Headset Speaker If the ringer device is set to Headset or Headset Speaker the headset should be connected to the IP phone an...

Page 759: ... headset or using the speakerphone You can disable the infrequently used audio device as required Procedure Handset headset speakerphone mode can be configured using the configuration file Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the speaker mode Parameter features speaker_mode enable Configure the handset mode Parameter features handset_mode enable Configure the headset...

Page 760: ...led 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features handset_mode enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone s handset 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None features headset_mode enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone s headset jack 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None ...

Page 761: ...ion Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default features headset_prior 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables headset prior feature You need to press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode in advance 0 Disabled the headset mode can be deactivated by pressing the Speakerphone key or the HEADSET key except off hook 1 Enabled the headset mode will not be deactivated until the user presses th...

Page 762: ...nce the IP phone connects to a call the user with the headset connected to the headset jack has full duplex capabilities while the user with the headset connected to the handset jack is only able to listen Note Procedure Dual headset can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure dual headset Parameter features headset_training Web...

Page 763: ...d to the headset jack have a full duplex conversation while the users with the headset connected to the handset jack are only allowed to listen to Note It works only if the value of the parameter features headset_mode enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Dual Headset Phone User Interface None To configure dual headset via web user interface 1 Click on Features...

Page 764: ...ndset Parameter voice handset_send Configure the sending volume of the headset Parameter voice headset_send Web User Interface Configure the sending volume of the speaker handset headset Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p f eatures audio q load Details of the Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default voice handfree_send Integer from 50 to 50 0 Description Configures the s...

Page 765: ...the change take effect Web User Interface Features Audio Handset Send Volume 50 50 Phone User Interface None voice headset_send Integer from 50 to 50 0 Description Configures the sending volume of the headset Note We recommend that you modify this parameter cautiously An unreasonable value may render the voice quality bad If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change tak...

Page 766: ...ly so the user cannot adjust the ringer volume on the phone This feature is used to avoid missing calls when the user turns down the ringer volume Procedure Ringer volume can be configured using the following method Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure the ringer volume forcedly Parameter force voice ring_vol Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameters Permitte...

Page 767: ... server When placing a call the IP phone will offer the enabled audio codec list to the server and then use the audio codec negotiated with the called party according to the priority Supported Audio Codecs The following table summarizes the supported audio codecs on IP phones Codec Algorithm Reference Bit Rate Sample Rate Packetization Time G722 G 722 RFC 3551 64 Kbps 16 Ksps 20ms PCMA G 711 a law...

Page 768: ...63 iLBC_15_2kpbs iLBC_13_33kpbs G722 PCMA PCMU G729 SIP T54S T52S T48S T46S T42S T41S T27G G722 PCMA PCMU G729 G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 G723_53 G723_63 opus iLBC_15_2kpbs iLBC_13_33kpbs G722 PCMA PCMU G729 SIP T27P G722 PCMA PCMU G729 G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 iLBC_15_2kpbs iLBC_13_33kpbs G722 PCMA PCMU G729 SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G G722 PCMA PCMU G729 G722 PCMA PCMU The network bandwi...

Page 769: ...n old configuration behavior refer to Yealink_SIP T2_Series_T19 P E2_T4_Series_T5_Series_CP860_IP_Phones_Administrator_Guide_V81 Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure the codecs to use on a per line basis Parameter account X codec payload_type enable Configure the priority for the enabled codec Paramet...

Page 770: ...en audio codec is PCMU the default value is 1 When audio codec is PCMA the default value is 1 When audio codec is G729 the default value is 1 When audio codec is G726 16 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726 24 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726 32 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726 40 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G723_53 the default value is 0 Whe...

Page 771: ...9 the default value is 4 When audio codec is G726_16 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726_24 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726_32 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G726_40 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G723_53 the default value is 0 When audio codec is G723_63 the default value is 0 When audio codec is opus the default value is 0 When audio codec is i...

Page 772: ... SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure the codecs to use and adjust the priority of the enabled codecs via web user interface 1 Click on Account Codec 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired codec from the Disable Codecs column and then click...

Page 773: ...ket sent to the destination and defines how much network bandwidth is used for the RTP stream transfer Before establishing a conversation codec and ptime are negotiated through SIP signaling The valid values of ptime range from 10 to 60 in increments of 10 milliseconds The default ptime is 20ms You can also disable the ptime negotiation The following table summarizes the valid values of ptime for ...

Page 774: ...0ms 60ms Procedure PTime can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File MAC cfg Configure the ptime Parameter account X ptime Web User Interface Configure the ptime Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p account adv q load acc 0 Details of Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default account X ptime 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 or 60 20 Description Con...

Page 775: ...er Interface Account Advanced PTime ms Phone User Interface None To configure the ptime for the account via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of PTime ms 4 Click Confirm to accept the change ...

Page 776: ...rty AEC may be used to reduce avoid echo when the user uses the handset Note Procedure AEC can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure AEC Parameter voice echo_cancellation Web User Interface Configure AEC Navigate to http phoneIPAddress serv let p settings voice q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted ...

Page 777: ... certain circumstances This increases the effective user phone radius and helps with the intelligibility of soft talkers Voice Activity Detection VAD Voice Activity Detection VAD is used in speech processing to detect the presence or absence of human speech When detecting period of silence VAD replaces that silence efficiently with special packets that indicate silence is occurring It can facilita...

Page 778: ...n Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default voice vad 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the VAD Voice Activity Detection feature on the IP phone 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Echo Cancellation VAD Phone User Interface None To configure VAD via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Voice 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of VAD 3 Click Confirm to...

Page 779: ...and bandwidth usage as low as possible Note For example A is talking with B A VAD 1 CNG 1 B VAD 0 CNG 1 If A mutes the call since VAD 1 A will send CN packets to B When receiving CN packets B will generate comfortable noise If B mutes the call since VAD 0 B will not send CN packets to A So even if CNG 1 B A will not hear comfortable noise Procedure CNG can be configured using the following methods...

Page 780: ... occur because of network congestion timing drift or route changes The jitter buffer located at the receiving end of the voice connection intentionally delays the arriving packets so that the end user can experience a clear connection with very little sound distortion IP phones support two types of jitter buffers fixed and adaptive A fixed jitter buffer adds the fixed delay to voice packets You ca...

Page 781: ...b wifi min voice jib wifi max voice jib wifi normal Web User Interface Configure the mode of jitter buffer and the delay time for jitter buffer in the wired network Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p setti ngs voice q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default voice jib adaptive 0 or 1 1 Description Configures the type of jitter buffer in the wired network ...

Page 782: ...te It works only if the value of the parameter voice jib adaptive is set to 1 Adaptive The value of this parameter should be greater than the values of the parameters voice jib normal and voice jib min Web User Interface Settings Voice JITTER BUFFER Max Delay Phone User Interface None voice jib normal Integer from 0 to 400 120 Description Configures the normal delay time in milliseconds of jitter ...

Page 783: ...eter voice jib wifi normal It is only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42S T41S T29G T27G IP phones The value of this parameter should be less than the values of the parameters voice jib wifi normal and voice jib wifi max Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None voice jib wifi max Integer from 0 to 500 500 Description Configures the maximum delay time in milliseconds of ji...

Page 784: ...parameter should be greater than the value of the parameter voice jib wifi min and less than the value of the parameter voice jib wifi min Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None To configure Jitter Buffer in the wired network via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Voice 2 Mark the desired radio box in the Type field 3 Enter the minimum delay time 20 300 for adaptive jitter buffer in...

Page 785: ... voice band SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by SIP INFO messages The method of transmitting DTMF digits is configurable on a per line basis RFC 2833 DTMF digits are transmitted using the RTP Event packets that are sent along with the voice path These packets use RFC 2833 format and must have a payload type that matches what the other end is listening for The default payload type for RTP Event...

Page 786: ...MAC cfg Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digit and the payload type Parameters account X dtmf type account X dtmf dtmf_payload account X dtmf info_type y0000000000xx c fg Configure the number of times for the IP phone to send the end RTP Event packet Parameter features dtmf repetition Specify how long the phone should play each DTMF tone for Parameter features dtmf duration Configure the ...

Page 787: ... 2833 2 SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages 3 RFC2833 SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833 and the SIP INFO messages Web User Interface Account Advanced DTMF Type Phone User Interface None account X dtmf dtmf_payload 1 Integer from 96 to 127 101 Description Configures the value of DTMF payload for a specific account Note It works only i...

Page 788: ...ser Interface None features dtmf duration Integer from 0 to 300 100 Description Configures the duration time in milliseconds for each digit when a sequence of DTMF tones is played out automatically Note If the time interval between two DTMF digits is less than this value two or more same DTMF digits could be identified as one DTMF digit This may cause the loss of one or more DTMF digits For exampl...

Page 789: ...T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure the method of transmitting DTMF digits via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Select the desired value from the pull down list of DTMF Type If SI...

Page 790: ...y of DTMF digits during an active call DTMF digits are displayed as on the LCD screen Suppress DTMF display delay defines whether to display the DTMF digits for a short period of time before displaying as Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure suppress DTMF display and suppress DTMF display de...

Page 791: ...one features dtmf hide_delay 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DTMF digits for a short period before displaying asterisks during an active call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter features dtmf hide is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Features General Information Suppress DTMF Display Delay Phone User Interface None To configu...

Page 792: ...on some traditional servers The IP phone sends specified DTMF digits to the server for transferring calls to third parties Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure transfer via DTMF Parameters features dtmf replace_tran features dtmf transfer Web User Interface Configure transfer via DTMF Naviga...

Page 793: ...phone will transmit the designated DTMF digits to the server for performing call transfer when pressing the Trans Transfer soft key or TRAN TRANSFER key during a call Web User Interface Features General Information DTMF Replace Tran Phone User Interface None features dtmf transfer String within 32 characters Blank Description Configures the DTMF digits to be transmitted to perform call transfer Va...

Page 794: ...ange Play Local DTMF Tone Play local DTMF tone allows IP phones to play a local DTMF tone during an active call If this feature is enabled you can hear the DTMF tone when pressing the IP phone s keypad during a call Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure play local DTMF tone Parameter features...

Page 795: ...n Play Local DTMF Tone Phone User Interface None To configure play local DTMF tone via web user interface 1 Click on Features General Information 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Play Local DTMF Tone 3 Click Confirm to accept the change Voice Quality Monitoring VQM Voice quality monitoring feature allows the IP phones to generate various quality metrics for listening quality a...

Page 796: ...ity metrics Procedure RTCP XR can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure RTCP XR Parameter voice rtcp_xr enable Web User Interface Configure RTCP XR Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p set tings voicemonitoring q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default voice rtcp_xr enable 0 or 1 0 Des...

Page 797: ...ion Generated at the end of a call Interval Generated during a call at a configurable period Alert Generated when the call quality degrades below a configurable threshold A wide range of performance metrics are generated in the following three ways Based on current values such as jitter jitter buffer max and round trip delay Covers the time period from the beginning of the call until the report is...

Page 798: ...port enable Configure the generation of interval packets Parameters phone_setting vq_rtcpxr interval_report enable phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_interval_period Configure the generation of alert packets Parameters phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_warning phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_critical phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_warning phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_critica...

Page 799: ...g vq_rtcpxr_display_symm_oneway_del ay enable phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_delay e nable phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq enable phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_moscq enable MAC cfg Configure the central report collector Parameters account X vq_rtcpxr collector_name account X vq_rtcpxr collector_server_host account X vq_rtcpxr collector_server_port Web User Interface Configure V...

Page 800: ...ollector at the end of each call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring VQ RTCP XR Session Report Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr interval_report enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to send an interval quality report to the central report collector periodically throughout a call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note To avoid overload the in...

Page 801: ...rt to the central report collector When the MOS LQ value computed by the phone is greater than 3 5 the phone will not send a warning alert quality report to the central report collector If it is set to blank warning alerts are not generated due to MOS LQ Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Warning threshold for Moslq Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_critic...

Page 802: ...ay delay One way delay includes both network delay and end system delay Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Warning threshold for Delay Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_critical 10 to 2000 Blank Description Configures the threshold value of one way delay in milliseconds that causes phone to send a critical alert quality report to the central report collect...

Page 803: ... the voice quality data of the last call on the phone at the path Menu Status More RTP RTP Status You can view the voice quality data of the current call by pressing RTP RTP Status soft key during a call 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Display Report options on phone Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time enable 0 or 1 1 Description E...

Page 804: ...play_local_call_id enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to display Local User on the LCD screen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting vq_rtcpxr states_show_on_gui enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Report options on phone Local User Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_remot...

Page 805: ...codec enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to display Remote Codec on the LCD screen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting vq_rtcpxr states_show_on_gui enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Report options on phone Remote Codec Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter enable ...

Page 806: ...hone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_packets_lost enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to display Packets Lost on the LCD screen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting vq_rtcpxr states_show_on_gui enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Report options on phone Packets Lost Phone Us...

Page 807: ...options on phone RoundTripDelay Phone User Interface None phone_setting vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the phone to display MOS LQ on the LCD screen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting vq_rtcpxr states_show_on_gui enable is set to 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Voice Monitoring Report options on phone M...

Page 808: ...e None account X vq_rtcpxr collector_server_host 1 IPv4 Address Blank Description Configures the IP address of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for a specific account Web User Interface Account Advanced VQ RTCP XR Collector Address Phone User Interface None account X vq_rtcpxr collector_server_port 1 Integer from 1 to 65535 5060 Desc...

Page 809: ...ings Voice Monitoring 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of VQ RTCP XR Session Report 3 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure interval report for VQ RTCPXR via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Voice Monitoring 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of VQ RTCP XR Interval Report 3 Enter the desired value in the Period for Interval Report field 4 Click Con...

Page 810: ...he desired value in the Critical threshold for Moslq field 4 Enter the desired value in the Warning threshold for Delay field 5 Enter the desired value in the Critical threshold for Delay field 6 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure RTP status displayed on the web page via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Voice Monitoring 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Displ...

Page 811: ... desired value from the pull down list of Display Report options on phone 3 Click Confirm to accept the change The RTP status will appear on the phone user interface at the path Menu Status More RTP Status To configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the LCD screen via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Voice Monitoring 2 In the Report options on phone block select the desired list ...

Page 812: ... of enabled items select the desired item and then click or The LCD screen will display the item s in the adjusted order 6 Click Confirm to accept the change To configure the central report collector via web user interface 1 Click on Account Advanced 2 Select the desired account from the pull down list of Account 3 Enter the host name of the central report collector in the VQ RTCP XR Collector Nam...

Page 813: ...Configuring Audio Features 791 5 Enter the port of the central report collector in the VQ RTCP XR Collector Port field 6 Click Confirm to accept the change ...

Page 814: ...Administrator s Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 792 ...

Page 815: ...ser and the default administrator password is admin For security reasons the user or administrator should change the default user or administrator password as soon as possible A user or an administrator can change the user password The administrator password can only be changed by an administrator Advanced menu options are strictly used by administrators Users can configure them only if they have ...

Page 816: ... user to 123 static security user_password admin 456 means setting the password of administrator to 456 Note IP phones support ASCII characters 32 126 0x20 0x7E in passwords You can set the password to be empty via web user interface only Web User Interface Security Password Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Change Password Note You cannot change the user password via phone...

Page 817: ... enter username and password for web access authentication Procedure Auto logout time can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure auto logout time Parameter features relog_offtime Web User Interface Configure auto logout time Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p features general q load Details of the Configuration Parameter...

Page 818: ... Confirm to accept the change Phone Lock Phone lock is used to lock the IP phone to prevent it from unauthorized use Once the IP phone is locked a user must enter the password to unlock it IP phones offer three types of phone lock Menu Key Function Keys and All Keys SIP T48G S IP phones only support All Keys type of phone lock The IP phone will not be locked immediately after the phone lock type i...

Page 819: ... IP phones The same as All Keys The Menu key key type is Menu is locked Pre dialin g Dialing screen Allowable Behavior You are allowed to press the Line Key key type is Line input or modify numbers dial emergency numbers and return to idle screen Keys not Locked IME More Cancel Send Delete and Line soft key line key key type is Line X OK Volume key Speakerphone key digit keys HEADSET key and key a...

Page 820: ...etting phone_lock lock_time_out Configure emergency numbers Parameter phone_setting emergency number Assign a phone lock DSS key Parameters linekey X type programablekey X type expansion_module X key Y type linekey X label programablekey X label expansion_module X key Y label linekey X shortlabel Web User Interface Configure the phone lock type Change the unlock PIN Configure the IP phone to autom...

Page 821: ...k Phone Lock Enable Phone User Interface Menu Basic Phone Lock Lock Enable phone_setting phone_lock lock_key_type 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the type of phone lock 0 All Keys 1 Function Keys 2 Menu Keys For more information refer to Phone Lock Type on page 797 Note It is not applicable to SIP T48G S IP phones It works only if the value of the parameter phone_setting phone_lock enable is set...

Page 822: ...bled Web User Interface Features Phone Lock Auto Lock 0 3600s Phone User Interface Menu Basic Phone Lock Auto Lock phone_setting emergency number String within 99 characters 112 911 110 Description Configures emergency numbers Multiple emergency numbers are separated by commas For SIP T54S T52S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27P T27G T23 P T23G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 If the value of the ...

Page 823: ...icable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T27G IP phones Web User Interface Dsskey Line Key Programable Key Type Phone User Interface Menu Features DSS Keys Line Keys X Type linekey X label 1 programablekey X label 2 expansion_module X key Y label 3 String within 99 characters Description Optional Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key Note EXT key is only ap...

Page 824: ...T46S X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 10 13 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 3 X is the Ext key ID For SIP T54S T52S X 1 3 Y 1 60 for SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 6 Y 1 40 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 6 Y 1 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured To configure phone lock via web user interface 1 Click on Features Phone Lock 2 Select the desired...

Page 825: ...configure the type of phone lock via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Basic Phone Lock 2 Enter the unlock PIN default PIN 123 in the Unlock PIN field 3 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Lock Enable field 4 Press or or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Lock Type field 5 Enter the desired interval of automatic phone lock in the Auto Lock fie...

Page 826: ...tocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is exchanged The TLS protocol uses asymmetric encryption for authentication of key exchange symmetric encryption for confidentiality and message authentication codes for integrity Symmetric encryption For symmetric encryption the encryption key and the correspondin...

Page 827: ... SHA EXP1024 DES CBC SHA EDH RSA DES CBC SHA EDH DSS DES CBC SHA DES CBC SHA DES CBC MD5 EXP1024 DHE DSS RC4 SHA EXP1024 RC4 SHA EXP1024 RC4 MD5 EXP EDH RSA DES CBC SHA EXP EDH DSS DES CBC SHA EXP DES CBC SHA EXP RC2 CBC MD5 EXP RC4 MD5 The following figure illustrates the TLS messages exchanged between the IP phone and TLS server to establish an encrypted communication channel Step1 IP phone send...

Page 828: ... When clients request a TLS connection with the IP phone the IP phone sends the server certificate to the clients for authentication The IP phone has two types of built in server certificates a unique server certificate and a generic server certificate You can only upload one server certificate to the IP phone The old server certificate will be overridden by the new one The format of the server ce...

Page 829: ... security ca_cert static security cn_validation Configure server certificates feature Parameter static security dev_cert Upload the trusted certificates Parameter static trusted_certificates url Delete all uploaded trusted certificates Parameter static trusted_certificates delete Upload the server certificates Parameter static server_certificates url Delete all uploaded server certificates Paramet...

Page 830: ...iption Configures the transport method the IP phone uses to communicate with the SIP server for a specific account 0 UDP 1 TCP 2 TLS 3 DNS NAPTR Web User Interface Account Register SIP Server Y Transport Phone User Interface None static security default_ssl_method 0 3 4 or 5 3 Description Configures the TLS version the IP phone uses to negotiate with the provisioning server when using TLS transpor...

Page 831: ...1 Enabled the IP phone will authenticate the server certificate based on the trusted certificates list Only when the authentication succeeds the IP phone will trust the server Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Security Trusted Certificates Only Accept Trusted Certificates Phone User Interface None static security ca_cert 0 ...

Page 832: ... Common Name Validation Phone User Interface None static security dev_cert 0 or 1 0 Description Configures the type of the device certificates for the IP phone to send for TLS authentication 0 Default Certificates 1 Custom Certificates Note If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Security Server Certificates Device Certificates Phone ...

Page 833: ...er Interface None Phone User Interface None static server_certificates url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL of the server certificate the IP phone sends for authentication Example static server_certificates url http 192 168 1 20 ca pem Note The certificate you want to upload must be in pem or cer format Web User Interface Security Server Certificates Load Serve...

Page 834: ... Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None 1 X is the account ID For SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G X 1 16 for SIP T52S T42G T42S X 1 12 for SIP T41P T41S T27P T27G X 1 6 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X 1 3 for SIP T21 P E2 X 1 2 for SIP T19 P E2 X 1 To configure TLS on a per line basis via web user interface 1 Click on Account Register 2 Select the desired account from...

Page 835: ...ficates Common Name Validation and CA Certificates 3 Click Confirm to accept the change A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot 4 Click OK to reboot the phone To upload a trusted certificate via web user interface 1 Click on Security Trusted Certificates 2 Click Browse to select the certificate pem crt cer or der from your local system 3 Click Upload to upl...

Page 836: ...ncrypts the RTP during VoIP phone calls to avoid interception and eavesdropping The parties participating in the call must enable SRTP feature simultaneously When this feature is enabled on both phones the type of encryption to use for the session is negotiated between the IP phones This negotiation process is compliant with RFC 4568 When a user places a call on the enabled SRTP phone the IP phone...

Page 837: ...ried in the SDP of the 200 OK message m audio 11780 RTP SAVP 0 101 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 101 telephone event 8000 a crypto 1 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline NGY4OGViMDYzZjQzYTNiOTNkOWRiYzRlMjM0Yzcz a sendrecv a ptime 20 a fmtp 101 0 15 SRTP is configurable on a per line basis When SRTP is enabled on both IP phones RTP streams will be encrypted and a lock icon appears on the LCD screen of ea...

Page 838: ...n Configures whether to use voice encryption service for a specific account 0 Disabled the IP phone will not use voice encryption service 1 Optional the IP phone will negotiate with the other IP phone what type of encryption to utilize for the session 2 Compulsory the IP phone is forced to use SRTP during a call Web User Interface Account Advanced RTP Encryption SRTP Phone User Interface None To c...

Page 839: ...s Configuration files MAC Oriented CFG file MAC cfg Common CFG file y0000000000xx cfg MAC local CFG file MAC local cfg or other custom CFG files for example sip cfg account cfg Contact Files MAC contact xml To encrypt decrypt files you may have to configure an AES key Configuration Parameters Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods Central Provisioning Configur...

Page 840: ...rvlet p settings au top q load Phone User Interface Configure AES keys Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static auto_provision update_file_mode 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone only to download the encrypted files 0 Disabled the IP phone will download the configuration files for example sip cfg account cfg MAC local cfg and MAC contact xml...

Page 841: ...he encrypted configuration files using corresponding key for example key2 key3 Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static auto_provision aes_key_16 com 16 characters Blank Description Configures the plaintext AES key for encrypting decrypting the Common CFG Custom CFG file The valid characters contain 0 9 A Z a z and the following special characters are also supported _ Example stati...

Page 842: ...ed file using the AES key configured by the parameter static auto_provision aes_key_16 com Web User Interface Settings Auto Provision MAC Oriented AES Key Phone User Interface Menu Advanced default password admin Auto Provision MAC Oriented AES static auto_provision encryption directory 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to encrypt MAC contact xml file using the plaintext AES ke...

Page 843: ...s_key_16 mac Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static auto_provision encryption config 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to encrypt MAC local cfg file using the plaintext AES key 0 Disabled the MAC local CFG file will be uploaded unencrypted and will replace the one encrypted or unencrypted stored on the server if you have configured to back up the MAC local CFG...

Page 844: ...e downloaded from the provisioning server to protect against unauthorized access and tampering of sensitive information for example login passwords registration information Yealink provides three encryption tools Config_Encrypt_Tool exe via graphical tool for Windows platform Config_Encrypt exe via DOS command line for Windows platform yealinkencrypt for Linux platform The encryption tools encrypt...

Page 845: ...unt_Security enc file if enabled and decrypt it into the plaintext key for example key2 using the built in key for example key1 Then the IP phone decrypts account cfg file using key2 After decryption the IP phone resolves configuration files and updates configuration settings onto the IP phone system The following describes how to use use Config_Encrypt_Tool exe to encrypt the account cfg file For...

Page 846: ... Generate to generate an AES key in the AES KEY field The configuration file s will be encrypted using the AES key in the AES KEY field If you mark the Auto Generate radio box the configuration file s will be encrypted using random AES key The AES keys of configuration files are different Note 5 Click Encrypt to encrypt the configuration file s 6 Click OK The target directory will be automatically...

Page 847: ...be used If the downloaded contact files is encrypted the IP phone will try to decrypt MAC contact xml file using the plaintext AES key After decryption the IP phone resolves contact files and updates contact information onto the IP phone system Incoming Signaling Validation Yealink IP phones support the following three optional levels of security for validating incoming network signaling Source IP...

Page 848: ...User Interface None Phone User Interface None sip request_validation digest list A valid string Blank Description Configures the name of the request method for which digest authentication will be applied It is used to challenge requests with digest authentication that use the local credentials for the associated registered account Example sip request_validation digest list INVITE SUBSCRIBE Web Use...

Page 849: ...on event A valid string Blank Description Configures which events specified within the Event header of SUBSCRIBE or NOTIFY request should be validated when performing the digest authentication If it is left blank all events will be validated Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None ...

Page 850: ...Administrator s Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 828 ...

Page 851: ...Files If your IP phone encounters some problems commonly the local log files or syslog files are needed You can configure the phone to log events locally There are two types of local log files MAC boot log for example 0015659188f2 boot log and MAC sys log for example 0015659188f2 sys log These two local log files can be exported via web user interface separately You can configure the IP phone to p...

Page 852: ...one Parameter static local_log max_file_size Configure the maximum size of the local log files to be stored on the server Parameter static auto_provision local_log backup appe nd max_file_size Configure the IP phone to upload local log files to the server Parameter static auto_provision local_log backup enab le Configure the period of the local log files uploads to the server Parameter static auto...

Page 853: ...ate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settin gs config q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitte d Values Defa ult static local_log enable 0 or 1 1 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to record log to the log files locally 0 Disabled the IP phone will stop recording log to the log files MAC boot log and MAC sys log locally The log files recorded before are still kept o...

Page 854: ...tional Web User Interface Settings Configuration Local Log Level Phone User Interface None static local_log max_file_size Refer to the following content Refer to the following content Description Configures the maximum size in KB of the log files MAC boot log and MAC sys log to be stored on the IP phone When this size is about to be exceeded 1 If the local log files are configured to be uploaded t...

Page 855: ...will upload the local log files to the provisioning server or the specific server to back up these files when one of the following happens Auto provisioning is triggered The size of the local log files reaches maximum configured by the parameter static local_log max_file_size It s time to upload local log files according to the upload period configured by the parameter static auto_provision local_...

Page 856: ...tive URL for example upload the IP phone will upload the local log files by extracting the root directory from the access URL of the provisioning server If you configure an absolute URL with protocol for example tftp the IP phone will upload the local log files using the desired protocol If no protocol the IP phone will use the same protocol with auto provisioning for uploading files Example stati...

Page 857: ... and the IP phone will continue to uploading log 1 Append Stop the IP phone will stop uploading log Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None static auto_provision local_log backup append max_file_size Integer from 200 to 65535 1024 Description Configures the maximum size in KB of the local log files MAC boot log and MAC sys log to be stored on the provisioning server or a specific server ...

Page 858: ...gs Configuration 2 Select Enabled from the pull down list of Enable Local Log 3 Select 6 from the pull down list of Local Log Level The default local log level is 3 4 Enter the limit size of the log files in the Max Log File Size 1024 2048KB field 5 Select sys log from the pull down list of Export Local Log 6 Click Confirm to accept the change 7 Reproduce the issue 8 Click Export to open the file ...

Page 859: ...ortion of a MAC boot log for example 00156574b150 boot log The MAC boot log file is forced to report the logs with all severity levels The following figure shows a portion of a MAC sys log for example 00156574b150 sys log The MAC sys log file reports the logs with a configured severity level and the higher For example if you have configured the severity level of the log to be reported to the MAC s...

Page 860: ... feature Parameter static syslog enable Configure syslog server and port Parameters static syslog server static syslog server_port Configure the transport protocol that the IP phone uses to upload log to the syslog server Parameter static syslog transport_type Configure the lowest severity level of the logs to be displayed in the syslog Parameter static syslog level Configure the facility that gen...

Page 861: ...to the log messages uploaded to the syslog server Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p setti ngs config q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Defa ult static syslog enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the IP phone to upload log messages to the syslog server in real time 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Configuration Enable Syslog Ph...

Page 862: ...log transport_type 0 1 or 2 0 Description Configures the transport protocol that the IP phone uses when uploading log messages to the syslog server 0 UDP 1 TCP 2 TLS Web User Interface Settings Configuration Syslog Transport Type Phone User Interface None static syslog level Integer from 0 to 6 3 Description Configures the lowest level of syslog information that displays in the syslog When you cho...

Page 863: ...e User Interface None static syslog facility Integer from 0 or 23 16 Description Configures the facility that generates the log messages 0 kernel messages 1 user level messages 2 mail system 3 system daemons 4 security authorization messages note 1 5 messages generated internally by syslogd 6 line printer subsystem 7 network news subsystem 8 UUCP subsystem 9 clock daemon note 2 10 security authori...

Page 864: ...address to the log messages uploaded to the syslog server 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Web User Interface Settings Configuration Syslog Prepend MAC Phone User Interface None To configure the phone to upload the system log to a syslog server via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Configuration 2 Select the desired value from the pull down list of Enable Syslog 3 Enter the syslog server address in the S...

Page 865: ... file in the desired folder on the syslog server The location of the folder may differ from the syslog server For more information refer to the network resources The following figure shows a portion of the syslog Capturing Packets You can capture packet in two ways capturing the packets via web user interface or using the Ethernet software You can analyze the packet captured for troubleshooting pu...

Page 866: ...ing the Packets Using the Ethernet Software Receiving data packets from the HUB Connect the Internet port of the IP phone and the PC to the same HUB and then use Sniffer Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic Receiving data packets from PC port Connect the Internet port of the IP phone to the Internet and the PC port of the IP phone to a PC Before capturing the signal traffic...

Page 867: ...led all data packets from Internet port can be received by PC port Note It works only if the value of the parameter static network pc_port enable is set to 1 Auto Negotiation If you change this parameter the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect Web User Interface Network Advanced Span to PC Span to PC Port Phone User Interface None To enable span to PC port via web user interface 1 ...

Page 868: ...ects a fatal failure This feature can be configured using the configuration files or via web user interface Procedure Watch Dog can be configured using the following methods Central Provisioning Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Configure Watch Dog feature Parameter static watch_dog enable Web User Interface Configure Watch Dog feature Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings preferen...

Page 869: ...lluminates For more information on the icons refer to Appendix G Reading Icons on page 901 Analyzing Configuration Files Wrong configurations may have an impact on your phone use You can export configuration file s to check the current configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot if necessary You can also import configuration files for a quick and easy configuration Six types of configuration fi...

Page 870: ...erface Export or import the custom configuration files Navigate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings config q load Details of the Configuration Parameter Parameter Permitted Values Default static configuration url URL within 511 characters Blank Description Configures the access URL for the custom configuration files Note The file format of custom configuration file must be bin If you change ...

Page 871: ...one user interface and web user interface It can be exported only if the value of the parameter static auto_provision custom protect is set to 1 MAC all cfg It contains all changes made via phone user interface web user interface and using configuration files MAC static cfg It contains all changes associated with static settings for example network settings made via phone user interface web user i...

Page 872: ...block click Browse to locate a CFG configuration file from your local system 3 Click Import to import the configuration file Exporting All the Diagnostic Files Yealink IP phones support three types of diagnostic files including Pcap trace log files boot log and sys log and BIN configuration files to help analyze your problem You can export these files at a time and troubleshoot if necessary The fi...

Page 873: ...mbined diagnostic files to your local system 2 Open the folder you extracted to and identify the files you will view You can select to export the Pcap trace log files boot log and sys log and BIN configuration files respectively For more information refer to Capturing Packets on page 843 Viewing Log Files on page 829 and BIN Configuration Files on page 848 Ping and Traceroute You can use ping and ...

Page 874: ...tuation and ping statistics Ping Statistics Network Connection Situation 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss The network connection between you and the target is strong 4 packets transmitted 1 2 or 3 packets received 75 50 or 25 packet loss The network connection between you and the target is unstable or faulty 4 packets transmitted 0 packets received 100 packet loss The network...

Page 875: ...aning Target unreachable H Host unreachable N Network unreachable Troubleshooting Solutions This section describes solutions to common issues that may occur while using the IP phone Upon encountering a scenario not listed in this section contact your Yealink reseller for further support IP Address Issues Why doesn t the IP phone get an IP address Do one of the following If your phone connects to t...

Page 876: ...204 13ff fe30 10e you can enter the URL for example fe80 204 13ff fe30 10e or http s fe80 204 13ff fe30 10e in the address bar of a web browser on your PC to access the web user interface Scenario 2 Yealink IP phones support using FTP TFTP HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files or resource files You can use one of these protocols for provisioning When provisioning your IP phone o...

Page 877: ...ters have been configured correctly Phone Book Issues What is the difference between a remote phone book and a local phone book A remote phone book is placed on a server while a local phone book is placed on the IP phone flash A remote phone book can be used by everyone that can access the server while a local phone book can only be used by a specific phone A remote phone book is always used as a ...

Page 878: ...ed to the connected call Try to disable the 180 ring workaround feature For more information refer to 180 Ring Workaround on page 382 Why does the IP phone play the local ringback tone instead of media when placing a long distance number without plus 0 Ensure that the 180 ring workaround feature is disabled For more information refer to 180 Ring Workaround on page 382 Wi Fi and Bluetooth Issues Wh...

Page 879: ... is on and the network is available in the process of upgrading Ensure that the web browser is not closed or refreshed when upgrading firmware via web user interface How can I verify the firmware generation and version of the phone Press the OK key when the IP phone is idle to check the firmware version For example 28 82 0 20 Item Description 1 28 Firmware ID The firmware ID for each IP phone mode...

Page 880: ... to the IP phone model The configuration may depend on support from a server Provisioning Issues What is auto provisioning Auto provisioning refers to the update of IP phones including update on configuration parameters local phone book firmware and so on You can use auto provisioning on a single phone but it makes more sense in mass deployment What is PnP Plug and Play PnP is a method for IP phon...

Page 881: ... not solve the problem Resetting the phone to factory configurations clears the flash parameters removes log files user data and cached data and resets the administrator password to admin All custom settings will be overwritten after resetting Five ways to reset the phone Reset local settings All configurations saved in the MAC local cfg file on the IP phone will be reset Changes associated with n...

Page 882: ...efault factory configurations To reset the IP phone via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Upgrade 2 Click Reset to factory in the Reset to factory field The web user interface prompts the message Do you want to reset to factory 3 Click OK to confirm the resetting The IP phone will be reset to factory sucessfully after startup Note Reset of your phone may take a few minutes Do not power off un...

Page 883: ...gate to http phoneIPAddress servlet p settings c onfig q load Details of Configuration Parameters Parameters Permitted Values Default static features custom_factory_config enable 0 or 1 0 Description Enables or disables the Custom Factory Configuration feature 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Import Factory Configuration item will be displayed on the IP phone s web user interface at the path Settings Configur...

Page 884: ...ry configuration files via web user interface 1 Click on Settings Configuration 2 Click Browse to locate the custom factory configuration file from your local system 3 Click Import When the custom factory configuration file is imported successfully you can reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations For more information on how to reset to factory configuration via web user interface refer ...

Page 885: ...ble If the value is set to 1 or the value is set to 0 and the header of the SIP NOTIFY message contains an additional string reboot true the IP phone will reboot immediately The NOTIFY message is formed as shown NOTIFY sip user dsthost SIP 2 0 To sip user dsthost From sip sipsak srchost CSeq 10 NOTIFY Call ID 1234 srchost Event check sync reboot true Procedure Changes can only be configured using ...

Page 886: ...IP phone will ignore the SIP NOTIFY message Web User Interface None Phone User Interface None How to reboot the IP phone via web phone user interface You can reboot your IP phone via web phone user interface To reboot the phone via phone user interface 1 Press Menu Advanced default password admin Reboot The LCD screen prompts the following warning 2 Press the OK soft key to reboot the phone The ph...

Page 887: ...Troubleshooting 865 The phone begins rebooting Any reboot of the phone may take a few minutes ...

Page 888: ...stination device UDP TCP SIP protocol port it is used for signaling interaction with SIP server 1024 65535 TR 069 Server IP address of TR 069 server Determined by destination device TCP TR 069 protocol port it is used to communicate with TR 069server 1024 65535 File server IP address of file server Determined by destination device TCP HTTP protocol port it is used to download file 1024 65535 Remot...

Page 889: ... protocol port it is used for IP phones to upload syslog information to syslog server 1024 65535 PNP Server IP address of PNP server Default value 224 0 1 75 5059 UDP TCP Protocol port it is used to obtain the URL of updating file from PNP server Multipaging Multipaging 65000 65001 PC IP address of PC Determined by the destination IP phones IP address of IP phones 1 65535 TCP HTTP port default val...

Page 890: ...68 Source Device Source IP Source Port Destination Device Destination IP Destination Port Listening port Protocol Description of destination port gateway device TR 069 Server IP address of TR 069 Server 1024 65535 TCP TR 069 protocol port it is used to communicate with TR 069server ...

Page 891: ... 248 Power and Startup Issues What will happen if I connect both PoE cable and power adapter Which has the higher priority IP phones use the PoE preferentially Why does the IP phone have no power If no lights appear on the IP phone when it is powered up do one of the following Reboot your IP phone Replace the power adapter Why is the LCD screen black If the power indicator LED is on the keypad is ...

Page 892: ...o on code and off code mean They are codes that the IP phone sends to the server when a certain action takes place On code is used to activate a feature on the server side while off code is used to deactivate a feature on the server side For example if you set the Always Forward on code to be 78 may vary on different servers and the target number to be 201 When you enable Always Forward on the IP ...

Page 893: ...sage when placing a call on hold For more information on RFC 2543 hold feature refer to Call Hold on page 392 For more information on capturing packets refer to Capturing Packets on page 843 What is the difference between Shared Call Appearance SCA and Bridge Lines Appearance BLA SCA and BLA are similar signaling methods that enable more than one phone to share a SIP line The method you use varies...

Page 894: ...Administrator s Guide for SIP T2 Series T19 P E2 T4 Series T5 Series IP Phones 872 For more information refer to Shared Call Appearance SCA on page 574 and Bridge Lines Appearance BLA on page 582 ...

Page 895: ...d to the Internet or a private network EAP MD5 Extensible Authentication Protocol Message Digest Algorithm 5 only provides authentication of the EAP peer to the EAP server but not mutual authentication EAP TLS Extensible Authentication Protocol Transport Layer Security provides for mutual authentication integrity protected cipher suite negotiation between two endpoints PEAP MSCHAPv2 Protected Exte...

Page 896: ...a TCP Transmission Control Protocol a transport layer protocol used by applications that require guaranteed delivery UDP User Datagram Protocol a protocol offers non guaranteed datagram delivery URI Uniform Resource Identifier a compact sequence of characters that identifies an abstract or physical resource URL Uniform Resource Locator specifies the address of an Internet resource VLAN Virtual LAN...

Page 897: ...nidad Tobago 3 30 Canada New Foundland St Johns 3 Argentina Buenos Aires Brazil DST Brazil no DST Denmark Greenland Nuuk 2 30 Newfoundland and Labrador 2 Brazil no DST 1 Portugal Azores 0 Denmark Faroe Islands Torshavn GMT Greenland Ireland Dublin Morocco Portugal Lisboa Porto Funchal Spain Canary Islands Las Palmas United Kingdom London 1 Albania Tirane Austria Vienna Belgium Brussels Caicos Chad...

Page 898: ...ralia Hobart Australia Sydney Melboume Canberra Russia Vladivostok 10 30 Australia Lord Howe Islands 11 New Caledonia Noumea Russia Srednekolymsk Time 11 30 Norfolk Island 12 New Zealand Wellington Auckland Russia Kamchatka Time 12 45 New Zealand Chatham Islands 13 Tonga Nukualofa 13 30 Chatham Islands 14 Kiribati Appendix C Trusted Certificates Yealink IP phones trust the following CAs by default...

Page 899: ... VeriSign Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority G5 VeriSign Class 4 Public Primary Certification Authority G2 VeriSign Class 4 Public Primary Certification Authority G3 VeriSign Universal Root Certification Authority ISRG Root X1 Let s Encrypt Authority X1 and Let s Encrypt Authority X2 certificates are signed by the root certificate ISRG Root X1 Baltimore CyberTrust Root DST Root CA X3 V...

Page 900: ...ority G2 RapidSSL CA Go Daddy Root Certificate Authority G2 Cybertrust Global Root COMODOSSLCA COMODO RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA COMODO RSA Certification Authority AmazonRootCA4 AmazonRootCA3 AmazonRootCA2 AmazonRootCA1 Yealink Root CA Yealink Equipment Issuing CA SIP Core Note Yealink endeavors to maintain a built in list of most common used CA Certificates Due to memory constraints w...

Page 901: ...7G IP phones The following table lists the number of DSS keys you can configure for each phone model Phone Model Line Key Programable Key Ext Key SIP T54S 27 13 60 SIP T52S 21 11 60 SIP T48G S 29 13 40 SIP T46G S 27 13 40 SIP T42G S 15 11 SIP T41P S 15 11 SIP T40P G 3 11 SIP T29G 27 14 39 SIP T27P G 21 14 39 SIP T23P G 3 11 SIP T21 P E2 2 11 SIP T19 P E2 11 Note The programable key takes effect on...

Page 902: ...e programablekey X xml_phonebook programablekey X history_type programablekey X pickup_value X ranges from 1 to 4 programablekey X label SIP T19 P E2 SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 SIP T29G T27P T27G SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S 1 SoftKey1 SoftKey1 SoftKey1 SoftKey1 SoftKey1 2 SoftKey2 SoftKey2 SoftKey2 SoftKey2 SoftKey2 3 SoftKey3 SoftKey3 SoftKey3 SoftKey3 SoftKey3...

Page 903: ...cel Cancel 11 CONF 12 HOLD HOLD 13 MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE 14 TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN Note For SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 IP phones Cancel key can be configured only when the parameter features keep_mute enable is set to 0 Disabled For SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G T29G T27P T27G T19 P E2 IP phones Mute key can be configured only when the parameter features keep_mute enable i...

Page 904: ...rom 1 to 15 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X ranges from 1 to 21 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 3 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X ranges from 1 to 2 for SIP T21 P E2 For programable keys X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 13 for SIP T52S T42G T42S T41P T41S T40P T40G X 1 14 for SIP T29G T27P T27G X 1 10 14 for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 for SIP T19 P E2 For ext keys...

Page 905: ...peed Dial 14 Intercom 15 Line 16 BLF 17 URL 18 Group Listening 20 Private Hold 22 XML Group 23 Group Pickup 24 Multicast Paging Paging 25 Record 27 XML Browser 34 Hot Desking 35 URL Record 38 LDAP only appear when the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 39 BLF List 40 Prefix 41 Zero Touch 42 ACD 45 Local Group 50 Phone Lock 56 Retrieve Park 61 Directory ...

Page 906: ...st Paging Paging 27 XML Browser 28 History 30 Menu 32 New SMS 33 Status 34 Hot Desking 38 LDAP only appear when the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 40 Prefix only applicable to soft keys 1 4 41 Zero Touch 43 Local Directory Local Phonebook 45 Local Group 47 XML Directory XML Phonebook 50 Phone Lock 51 Switch Account Up not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones 52 Switch Account Down not applicabl...

Page 907: ...ice Mail 13 Speed Dial 14 Intercom 15 Line 16 BLF 17 URL 18 Group Listening 20 Private Hold 22 XML Group 23 Group Pickup 24 Multicast Paging Paging 25 Record 27 XML Browser 34 Hot Desking 35 URL Record 37 Switch only applicable to ext key 1 for SIP T29G T27P T27G IP phones 38 LDAP only appear when the parameter ldap enable is set to 1 39 BLF List 40 Prefix 41 Zero Touch 42 ACD ...

Page 908: ...efault value of the line key 13 21 is 0 For SIP T42G S IP phones The default value of the line key 1 12 is 15 and the default value of the line key 13 15 is 0 For SIP T41P S IP phones The default value of the line key 1 6 is 15 and the default value of the line key 7 15 is 0 For SIP T27P G IP phones The default value of the line key 1 6 is 15 and the default value of the line key 7 21 is 0 For SIP...

Page 909: ...witch Account Up When X 8 the default value is 52 Switch Account Down When X 9 the default value is 33 Status When X 10 the default value is 0 NA When X 13 the default value is 0 NA For SIP T29G T27P T27G IP phones When X 1 the default value is 28 History When X 2 the default value is 61 Directory When X 3 the default value is 5 DND When X 4 the default value is 30 Menu When X 5 the default value ...

Page 910: ... For SIP T19 P E2 IP phones When X 1 the default value is 28 History When X 2 the default value is 61 Directory When X 3 the default value is 5 DND When X 4 the default value is 30 Menu When X 5 the default value is 28 History When X 6 the default value is 61 Directory When X 7 the default value is 0 NA When X 8 the default value is 0 NA When X 9 the default value is 33 Status When X 13 the defaul...

Page 911: ...5 Line 16 BLF 17 URL 18 Group Listening 20 Private Hold 22 XML Group 23 Group Pickup 24 Multicast Paging Paging 25 Record 27 XML Browser 28 History 30 Menu 32 New SMS 33 Status 34 Hot Desking 35 URL Record 37 Switch 38 LDAP 39 BLF List 40 Prefix 41 Zero Touch 42 ACD 43 Local Directory 45 Local Group 47 XML Directory 50 Phone Lock ...

Page 912: ...le to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones For line keys X ranges from 1 to 29 for SIP T48G S X ranges from 1 to 27 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X ranges from 1 to 15 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X ranges from 1 to 21 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 3 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X ranges from 1 to 2 for SIP T21 P E2 For programable keys X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 13 for SIP T52...

Page 913: ...onfigure this parameter 1 Conference 2 Forward 3 Transfer 4 Hold 5 DND 7 ReCall 8 SMS 9 Direct Pickup 11 DTMF 17 URL 18 Group Listening 20 Private Hold 22 XML Group 24 Multicast Paging Paging 25 Record 27 XML Browser 34 Hot Desking 35 URL Record 38 LDAP 39 BLF List 40 Prefix 41 Zero Touch 42 ACD 45 Local Group 50 Phone Lock 61 Directory 66 Paging List 73 Custom Key Format Integer Default Value For...

Page 914: ...0G T23P T23G 1 to 2 for SIP T21 P E2 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 16 Line 16 Example linekey 1 line 2 Parameter linekey X value Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Parameter programablekey X value Parameter expansion_module X key Y value Description Configures the value for some key features For line keys not applicable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones X ranges from 1 to 29 for SIP T48G S X ranges from 1 to 27 for...

Page 915: ... to 40 For SIP T29G T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 20 22 to 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured Format String Default Value Blank Range String within 99 characters Example When you assign the Speed Dial to the line key this parameter is used to specify the number you want to dial out linekey 1 value 1001 Parameter linekey X label Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Parameter pro...

Page 916: ... ranges from 1 to 3 Y ranges from 1 to 60 For SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 40 For SIP T29G T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 20 22 to 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured Format String Default Value Blank Range String within 99 characters Example linekey 1 label Dir Parameter linekey X pickup_value Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Parameter expa...

Page 917: ...1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 20 22 to 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured Format String Default Value Blank Range String within 256 characters Example linekey 1 pickup_value 88 Parameter linekey X xml_phonebook Configuration File y0000000000xx cfg Parameter programablekey X xml_phonebo ok Parameter expansion_module X key Y xml_p honebook Description Configures the desired group or remote phone book wh...

Page 918: ... for SIP T23P T23G T21 P E2 X 1 9 13 14 for SIP T19 P E2 For ext keys only applicable to SIP T54S T52S T48G T48S T46G T46S T29G T27P T 27G IP phones For SIP T54S T52S X ranges from 1 to 3 Y ranges from 1 to 60 For SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 40 For SIP T29G T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 20 22 to 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured When the key...

Page 919: ...licable to SIP T19 P E2 IP phones X ranges from 1 to 29 for SIP T48G S X ranges from 1 to 27 for SIP T54S T46G T46S T29G X ranges from 1 to 15 for SIP T42G T42S T41P T41S X ranges from 1 to 21 for SIP T52S T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 3 for SIP T40P T40G T23P T23G X ranges from 1 to 2 for SIP T21 P E2 For programable keys X 1 10 12 14 for SIP T54S T48G T48S T46G T46S X 1 10 13 for SIP T52S T42G T4...

Page 920: ...ter expansion_module X key Y exten sion X ranges from 1 to 3 Y ranges from 1 to 60 For SIP T48G T48S T46G T46S X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 40 For SIP T29G T27P T27G X ranges from 1 to 6 Y ranges from 1 to 20 22 to 40 Ext key 21 cannot be configured Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 to 31 Example Configures the channel of the second multicast paging group linekey 2 extension 2 ...

Page 921: ...ndix E Auto Provisioning Flowchart Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings The following shows auto provisioning flowchart for Yealink IP phones when a user wishes to keep user personalized configuration settings ...

Page 922: ...les you are using for provisioning All static settings are never be saved to MAC local cfg file All static settings are not affected by the overwrite mode That is the actual values will not be changed even if you delete the parameters associated with static settings or you clear the values of the parameters associated with static settings in the configuration file For more information on static se...

Page 923: ...g table provides a description for each icon on IP phones T54S T52S T48S T48G T46S T46G T42S T41S T42G T41P T40P G T29G T27G T27P T23P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description Network is unavailable Private line registers successfully Registration failed Flashing Flashing Registering Hands free speakerphone mode Handset mode ...

Page 924: ...5 Series IP Phones 902 T54S T52S T48S T48G T46S T46G T42S T41S T42G T41P T40P G T29G T27G T27P T23P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description Headset mode Voice Mail Text Message Auto Answer Do Not Disturb Call Forward Call Hold Call Mute Keep Mute Ringer volume is 0 ...

Page 925: ...29G T27G T27P T23P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description Phone Lock Received Calls Placed Calls Missed Calls Forwarded Calls Recording starts successfully USB recording Recording is paused USB recording Recording box is full DSSKey recording A call cannot be recorded DSSKey ...

Page 926: ...9G T27G T27P T23P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description recording Recording starts successfully DSSKey recording Recording cannot be started DSSKey recording Recording cannot be stopped DSSKey recording VPN is enabled Bluetooth mode is on Bluetooth headset is both paired and connected Bluetooth Enabled mobile phone is both paired and connected ...

Page 927: ...ection is successful Wi Fi connection failed Conference The default contact icon The default caller photo Line key type is Line line is seized Line key type is Speed Dial Line key type is BLF BLF List BLF BLF list idle state Line key type is BLF BLF List BLF BLF list ringing state Line key type is BLF BLF List BLF BLF list talking state ...

Page 928: ...on Line key type is BLF BLF hold state Line key type is BLF BLF List BLF BLF list callout state Line key type is BLF BLF List BLF BLF list failed state Line key type is BLF List BLF list call park state Line key type is Voice Mail Line key type is Direct Pickup Line key type is Group Pickup Line key type is Call Park park successfully call park idle state Line key type is Call Park call park ...

Page 929: ...ark failed Line key type is Retrieve Park Line key type is Intercom intercom idle state Line key type is Intercom intercom ringing state Talking Talking Line key type is Intercom intercom talking state Callout Callout Line key type is Intercom intercom callout state Line key type is Intercom intercom failed state Line key type is DTMF Prefix ...

Page 930: ...P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description Line key type is Local Group XML Group LDAP Line key type is XML Browser Line key type is Conference Line key type is Forward Line key type is Transfer Line key type is Hold Private Hold Line key type is DND Line key type is Recall Line key type is SMS Line key type is Record URL Record Line key type is Record URL Record ...

Page 931: ...2 Description recording starts successfully Line key type is Multicast Paging Group Listening Paging List Line key type is Hot Desking Line key type is ACD Line key type is Zero Touch Line key type is URL Line key type is Phone Lock Line key type is Directory Line key type is Custom Key The ACD state is available ...

Page 932: ...n and x and x and x and x and x and x and x The ACD state is unavailable The ACD state is Wrap up Log out of the ACD system The shared line bridged line is idle Flashing Flashing The shared line receives ring back tone Flashing Flashing The shared line receives an incoming call The shared line is in conversation The shared line conversation is placed on public hold USB flash drive is detecting ...

Page 933: ...54S T52S T48S T48G T46S T46G T42S T41S T42G T41P T40P G T29G T27G T27P T23P T23 G T21 P E2 T19 P E2 Description Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing USB flash drive is detected High Definition Voice ...

Page 934: ...igest access authentication RFC 2782 A DNS RR for specifying the location of services DNS SRV RFC 2806 URLs for Telephone Calls RFC 2833 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits Telephony Tones and Telephony Signals RFC 2915 The Naming Authority Pointer NAPTR DNS Resource Record RFC 2976 The SIP INFO Method RFC 3087 Control of Service Context using SIP Request URI RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol repla...

Page 935: ...ymmetric Response Routing RFC 3608 SIP Extension Header Field for Service Route Discovery During Registration RFC 3611 RTP Control Protocol Extended Reports RTCP XR RFC 3665 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Basic Call Flow Examples RFC 3666 SIP Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Call Flows RFC 3680 SIP Event Package for Registrations RFC 3702 Authentication Authorization and Accounting Requirem...

Page 936: ...Agents RFC 4583 Session Description Protocol SDP Format for Binary Floor Control Protocol BFCP Streams RFC 4662 A SIP Event Notification Extension for Resource Lists RFC 4730 Event Package for KPML RFC 5009 P Early Media Header RFC 5079 Rejecting Anonymous Requests in SIP RFC 5359 Session Initiation Protocol Service Examples RFC 5589 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Call Control Transfer RFC 5630 T...

Page 937: ... Session Initiation Protocol SIP draft ietf bliss shared appearances 15 txt Shared Appearances of a Session Initiation Protocol SIP Address of Record AOR To find the applicable Request for Comments RFC document go to http www ietf org rfc html and enter the RFC number SIP Request The following SIP request messages are supported Method Supported Notes REGISTER Yes INVITE Yes Yealink IP phones suppo...

Page 938: ...t Info Yes Allow Yes Allow Events Yes Authorization Yes Call ID Yes Call Info Yes Contact Yes Content Length Yes Content Type Yes CSeq Yes Diversion Yes History Info Yes Event Yes Expires Yes From Yes Max Forwards Yes Min SE Yes P Asserted Identity Yes P Preferred Identity Yes Proxy Authenticate Yes Proxy Authorization Yes In the following table a Yes in the Supported column means the header is se...

Page 939: ...rted Yes To Yes User Agent Yes Via Yes SIP Responses The following SIP responses are supported Note 1xx Responses Provisional 1xx Response Supported Notes 100 Trying Yes 180 Ringing Yes 181 Call Is Being Forwarded Yes 182 Queued Yes 183 Session Progress Yes In the following table a Yes in the Supported column means the header is sent and properly parsed The phone may not actually generate the resp...

Page 940: ...es 302 Moved Temporarily Yes 305 Use Proxy Yes 380 Alternative Service No 4xx Responses Request Failure 4xx Response Supported Notes 400 Bad Request Yes 401 Unauthorized Yes 402 Payment Required Yes 403 Forbidden Yes 404 Not Found Yes 405 Method Not Allowed Yes 406 Not Acceptable No 407 Proxy Authentication Required Yes 408 Request Timeout Yes 409 Conflict No 410 Gone No 411 Length Required No 413...

Page 941: ...ess Incomplete Yes 485 Ambiguous No 486 Busy Here Yes 487 Request Terminated Yes 488 Not Acceptable Here Yes 491 Request Pending No 493 Undecipherable No 5xx Responses Server Failure 5xx Response Supported Notes 500 Server Internal Error Yes 501 Not Implemented Yes 502 Bad Gateway No 503 Service Unavailable Yes 504 Server Time out No 505 Version Not Supported No 513 Message Too Large No 6xx Respon...

Page 942: ...P Call Flows SIP uses six request methods INVITE Indicates a user is being invited to participate in a call session ACK Confirms that the client has received a final response to an INVITE request BYE Terminates a call and can be sent by either the caller or the callee CANCEL Cancels any pending searches but does not terminate a call that has already been accepted OPTIONS Queries the capabilities o...

Page 943: ... follows 1 User A calls User B 2 User B answers the call 3 User B hangs up User A Proxy Server User B F1 INVITE B F2 INVITE B F3 100 Trying F9 ACK F10 ACK F5 180 Ringing 2 way RTP channel established F8 200 OK F7 200 OK F6 180 Ringing F4 100 Trying F11 BYE F12 BYE F13 200 OK F14 200 OK Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP INVITE message to a proxy server The ...

Page 944: ... B F4 100 Trying Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the SIP 100 Trying to User A to indicate that the INVITE request has been received by User B F5 180 Ringing User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response to the proxy server The 180 Ringing response indicates that the User B is being alerted F6 180 Ringing Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 180 Rin...

Page 945: ...to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response indicates that User A has received the BYE request The call session is now terminated F14 200 OK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server forwards the SIP 200 OK response to User B to indicate that User A has received the BYE request The call session is now terminated Unsuccessful Call Setup Called User is Bu...

Page 946: ...er B is inserted in the Request URI field User A is identified as the call session initiator in the From field A unique numeric identifier is assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call ID field The transaction number within a single call leg is identified in the CSeq field The media capability User A is ready to receive is specified The port on which User B is prepared to receive the RTP dat...

Page 947: ...The proxy server forwards the 486 Busy Here response to notify User A that User B is busy F7 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The SIP ACK message indicates that User A has received the 486 Busy Here message F8 ACK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server forwards the SIP ACK to User B to indicate that the 486 Busy Here message has already been received Unsuccess...

Page 948: ...equest URI field User A is identified as the call session initiator in the From field A unique numeric identifier is assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call ID field The transaction number within a single call leg is identified in the CSeq field The media capability User A is ready to receive is specified The port on which User B is prepared to receive the RTP data is specified F2 INVITE ...

Page 949: ...orwards the SIP CANCEL request to notify User B that User A wants to disconnect the call F7 200 OK User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The SIP 200 OK response indicates that User B has received the CANCEL request F8 200 OK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the SIP 200 OK response to notify User A that the CANCEL request has been processed su...

Page 950: ... 2 way RTP channel established Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends an INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call session In the INVITE request The IP address of User B is inserted in the Request URI field User A is identified as the call session initiator in the From field A unique numeric identifier is ...

Page 951: ... response notifies the proxy server that the connection has been made F6 200 OK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 200 OK message to User A The 200 OK response notifies User A that the connection has been made F7 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The ACK confirms that User A has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active F8 ACK...

Page 952: ...rily inactive No RTP packets are being sent F14 ACK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server sends the ACK message to User B The ACK confirms that the proxy server has received the 200 OK response Successful Call Setup and Call Waiting The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which two parties are in a call one of the participants receives and answers an i...

Page 953: ...F17 ACK F18 ACK F19 200 OK F21 ACK F22 ACK F14 INVITE B sendonly 2 way RTP channel established No RTP Packets being sent 2 way RTP channel established Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends an INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call session In the INVITE request The IP address of User B is inserted in th...

Page 954: ...A The proxy server forwards the 180 Ringing response to User A User A hears the ring back tone indicating that User B is being alerted F5 200 OK User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response notifies proxy server that the connection has been made F6 200 OK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 200 OK message to User A The 200 OK re...

Page 955: ...Proxy Server User A sends a SIP 180 Ringing response to the proxy server The 180 Ringing response indicates that the user is being alerted F12 180 Ringing Proxy Server to User C The proxy server forwards the 180 Ringing response to User C User C hears the ring back tone indicating that User A is being alerted F13 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends a mid call INVITE request to the proxy ser...

Page 956: ...as been made F20 200 OK Proxy Server User C The proxy server forwards the 200 OK message to User C F21 ACK User C to Proxy Server User C sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The ACK confirms that User C has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active F22 ACK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the SIP ACK to User A to confirm that User C has received the 200 OK response...

Page 957: ...nnel established F23 180 Ringing F11 REFER F12 202 Accepted F26 200 OK F2 INVITE B F3 180 Ringing F5 200 OK F8 ACK F22 INVITE C F19 200 OK F27 ACK F18 BYE 2 way RTP channel established F9 REFER F10 202 Accepted F17 BYE F20 200 OK F21 INVITE C F24 180 Ringing F25 200 OK F28 ACK User C Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends an INVITE message to the proxy server The INV...

Page 958: ...SIP 180 Ringing response to the proxy server The 180 Ringing response indicates that the user is being alerted F4 180 Ringing Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 180 Ringing response to User A User A hears the ring back tone indicating that User B is being alerted F5 200 OK User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response notifies U...

Page 959: ...lease the call F14 BYE Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the BYE request to User A F15 200OK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response confirms that User A has received the BYE request F16 200OK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server forwards the SIP 200 OK response to User B F17 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SI...

Page 960: ...y Server to User C The proxy server forwards the ACK message to User C The ACK confirms that User A has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active Call Transfer with Consultation The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which two parties are in a call and then one of the parties transfers the call to the third party with consultation This...

Page 961: ...K F10 INVITE B sendonly F11 200 OK F14 ACK F16 INVITE C F18 180 Ringing F20 200 OK F22 ACK 2 way RTP channel established F25 REFER F26 202 Accepted F31 BYE F32 BYE F33 200 OK F34 200 OK 2 way RTP channel established Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends an INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call session...

Page 962: ...y Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 180 Ringing response to User A User A hears the ring back tone indicating that User B is being alerted F5 200 OK User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response notifies User A that the connection has been made F6 200 OK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 200 OK message to User A Th...

Page 963: ...rms that the proxy server has received the 200 OK response F15 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the proxy server In the INVITE request a unique Call ID is generated and the Contact URI field indicates that User A requests the call F16 INVITE Proxy Server to User C The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the To field to User C The proxy server sends the INVITE request...

Page 964: ...roxy server sends a SIP 202 Accepted response to User A The 202 Accepted response notifies User A that the proxy server has received the REFER message F25 REFER Proxy Server to User B The proxy server forwards the REFER message to User B F26 202 Accepted User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 202 Accept response to the proxy server The 202 Accepted response indicates that User B accepts the tra...

Page 965: ...estination number is User C 2 User A calls User B 3 User B forwards the incoming call to User C 4 User C answers the call Call is established between User A and User C User A Proxy Server User B User C F1 INVITE B F2 INVITE B F3 302 Move Temporarily F6 ACK F7 INVITE C F8 INVITE C F9 180 Ringing F10 180 Ringing F11 200 OK F12 200 OK F13 ACK F14 ACK F4 ACK 2 way RTP channel established F5 302 Move T...

Page 966: ...ilable at SIP phone B User B rewrites the contact URI F4 ACK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to User B the ACK message notifies User B that the proxy server has received the 302 Move Temporarily message F5 302 Move Temporarily Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 302 Moved Temporarily message to User A F6 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to ...

Page 967: ...ACK confirms that User A has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active F14 ACK Proxy Server to User C The proxy server forwards the ACK message to User C The ACK confirms that the proxy server has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active Busy Call Forward The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones in which User B h...

Page 968: ...hannel established Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends the INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call session In the INVITE request The IP address of User B is inserted in the Request URI field User A is identified as the call session initiator in the From field A unique numeric identifier is assigned to...

Page 969: ...B The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to User B the ACK message notifies User B that the proxy server has received the ACK message F7 302 Move Temporarily Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 302 Moved Temporarily message to User A F8 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The ACK message notifies the proxy server that User A has received the ACK message...

Page 970: ... Server to User C The proxy server sends the ACK message to User C No Answer Call Forward The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones in which User B has enabled no answer call forward The incoming call is forwarded to User C when User B does not answer the incoming call after a period of time In this call flow scenario the end users are User A User B ...

Page 971: ...ription F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends the INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call session In the INVITE request The IP address of User B is inserted in the Request URI field User A is identified as the call session initiator in the From field A unique numeric identifier is assigned to the call and is inserted in the Ca...

Page 972: ...ct URI F6 ACK Proxy Server to User B The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to User B the ACK message notifies User B that the proxy server has received the ACK message F7 302 Move Temporarily Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 302 Moved Temporarily message to User A F8 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The ACK message notifies the proxy server that ...

Page 973: ...call session is now active F16 ACK Proxy Server to User C The proxy server sends the ACK message to User C The ACK confirms that the proxy server has received the 200 OK response Call Conference The following figure illustrates successful three way calling between Yealink IP phones in which User A mixes two RTP channels and therefore establishes a conference between User B and User C In this call ...

Page 974: ... User B is hold F16 INVITE C F18 180 Ringing F17 180 Ringing F19 200 OK F20 200 OK F21 ACK F22 ACK Both calls are active come into three party conference User A Proxy Server User B User C Initiate three party conference Step Action Description F1 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends the INVITE message to a proxy server The INVITE request is an invitation to User B to participate in a call se...

Page 975: ...rted F5 200 OK User B to Proxy Server User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server The 200 OK response notifies User A that the connection has been made F6 200 OK Proxy Server to User A The proxy server forwards the 200 OK message to User A The 200 OK response notifies User A that the connection has been made F7 ACK User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server The AC...

Page 976: ...F15 INVITE User A to Proxy Server User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the proxy server In the INVITE request a unique Call ID is generated and the Contact URI field indicates that User A requests the call F16 INVITE Proxy Server to User C The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the To field to User C The proxy server sends the SIP INVITE request to User C F17 180 Ringing User C to Proxy Server User ...

Page 977: ...nds a SIP ACK to the proxy server The ACK confirms that User A has received the 200 OK response The call session is now active F22 ACK Proxy Server to User C The proxy server sends the ACK message to User C The ACK confirms that the proxy server has received the 200 OK response ...

Page 978: ...277 Attended Transfer 418 Audio Codecs 745 Auto Answer 345 Auto Logout Time 795 Automatic Call Distribution ACD 568 Automatic Gain Control AGC 755 Auto Redial 342 B Backlight 174 Background Noise Suppression BNS 755 Backing up the local Contacts 332 Blind Transfer 418 Block Out 279 Bluetooth 179 Boot Files 99 Boot Files Configuration Files and Resource Files 99 Bridge Lines Appearance BLA 582 Busy...

Page 979: ...46 Enhanced DSS Keys 688 Expansion Modules 1 Exporting All the Diagnostic Files 850 G Getting Information from Status Indicators 847 Getting Started 3 Group Call Pickup 443 H H 323 xii Handset Headset Speakerphone Mode 737 Headset Prior 735 Hide Feature Access Codes 567 Hot Desking 614 Hotline 295 I Idle Clock 178 Incoming Signaling Validation 825 Index 956 Initialization Process Overview 4 Interc...

Page 980: ...Login 507 R Reading the Configuration Parameter Tables vii Real Time Transport Protocol RTP Ports 676 Recommended References xi Reboot in Talking 502 ReCall 454 Recording and URL Recording 607 Resource Files 103 Redial Tone 713 Related Documentations vi Remote Phone Book 512 Remote Phone Book Template File 512 Replace Rule 267 Replace Rule Template File 269 Reserve in User Name 495 Return Message ...

Page 981: ...S 804 Troubleshooting 829 Troubleshooting Methods 829 Troubleshooting Solutions 853 TR 069 Device Management 679 U Understanding VoIP Principle and SIP Components xii Unregister When Reboot 499 Upgrading Firmware 111 USB Recording 505 Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog 384 User Agent Client UAC 953 User Agent Server UAS 515 User and Administrator Password 793 V Verifying Startup 6 Viewing Log Files 829 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SIP-T19 E2 T4 Series

NEC DT730 User Manual preview
DT730
Brand: NEC Pages: 216
Audiovox CDM 8900 Owner'S Manual preview
CDM 8900
Brand: Audiovox Pages: 137
Opel mobile FlipPhone 4 Operator'S Manual preview
FlipPhone 4
Brand: Opel mobile Pages: 76
TCL 20 R 5G Service Manual preview
20 R 5G
Brand: TCL Pages: 19
Docomo Optimus L-04E Instruction Manual preview
Optimus L-04E
Brand: Docomo Pages: 194
Mitel 5212 IP Phone User Manual preview
5212 IP Phone
Brand: Mitel Pages: 60
Wynncom W304 User Manual preview
W304
Brand: Wynncom Pages: 27
Pantech TX-1000C User Manual preview
TX-1000C
Brand: Pantech Pages: 70
Telstra TOUGH T90 User Manual preview
TOUGH T90
Brand: Telstra Pages: 101
Samsung C3212 Duos Service Manual preview
C3212 Duos
Brand: Samsung Pages: 77
Samsung Galaxy A33 User Manual preview
Galaxy A33
Brand: Samsung Pages: 143
Samsung Galaxy A25 5G User Manual preview
Galaxy A25 5G
Brand: Samsung Pages: 153
Samsung SM-G980F SM-G980F/DS SM-G981B SM-G981B/DS... User Manual preview
SM-G980F SM-G980F/DS SM-G981B SM-G981B/DS...
Brand: Samsung Pages: 252
Samsung Galaxy A34 User Manual preview
Galaxy A34
Brand: Samsung Pages: 163
Samsung SM-S921W User Manual preview
SM-S921W
Brand: Samsung Pages: 219
Bosch Conettix ITS-300GSM Installation Manual preview
Conettix ITS-300GSM
Brand: Bosch Pages: 10
Bosch B441 Installation Manual preview
B441
Brand: Bosch Pages: 2
Bosch B440 Installation Manual preview
B440
Brand: Bosch Pages: 15

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands